Bow310 en Col96 Fv Part a4

BOW310Interactive Analysis Report Design

I (BOW310)other solution

Date

Training Center

Instructors

Education Website

Participant HandbookCourse Version: 96Course Duration: 2 Day(s)Material Number: 50103380

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Copyright

Copyright © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changedwithout prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary softwarecomponents of other software vendors.

Trademarks

• Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® areregistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

• IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®,S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

• ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.• INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered

trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.• UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.• Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,

VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarksof Citrix Systems, Inc.

• HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, WorldWide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

• JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.• JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for

technology invented and implemented by Netscape.• SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP

EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.comare trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countriesall over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks oftheir respective companies.

Disclaimer

THESEMATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLYDISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTSCONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANYKIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOSTPROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDEDSOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g201162010235

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

About This HandbookThis handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of thiscourse, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic ConventionsAmerican English is the standard used in this handbook. The followingtypographic conventions are also used.

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. Theseinclude field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as wellas menu names, paths, and options.

Also used for cross-references to other documentationboth internal and external.

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles ofgraphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These includereport names, program names, transaction codes, tablenames, and individual key words of a programminglanguage, when surrounded by body text, for exampleSELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory namesand their paths, messages, names of variables andparameters, and passages of the source text of aprogram.

Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters thatyou enter in the system exactly as they appear in thedocumentation.

<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that youreplace these words and characters with appropriateentries.

2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

About This Handbook BOW310

Icons in Body TextThe following icons are used in this handbook.

Icon Meaning

For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point

Exception or caution

Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor'spresentation.

iv © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2011

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

ContentsCourse Overview ......................................................... vii

Course Goals .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .viiCourse Objectives ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vii

Unit 1: Introducing Interactive Analysis .............................. 1Describing Interactive Analysis Concepts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Explaining Interactive Analysis Core Functionality .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8Describing Interactive Analysis and the SAP BusinessObjects

Business Intelligence Platform ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Unit 2: Creating Interactive Analysis Documents with Queries 17Querying with Interactive Analysis.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Creating a New Document.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Modifying a Document's Query .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Working in the Query Panel .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Unit 3: Restricting Data Returned by a Query..................... 47Restricting Data with Query Filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Modifying a Query with a Predefined Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Applying a Single-value Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Using Wildcards in Query Filters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Using Prompts to Restrict Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Using Complex Filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Unit 4: Designing Interactive Analysis Reports .................. 95Working with Interactive Analysis Documents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Displaying Data in Tables ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Working with Tables ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121Presenting Data in Free-standing Cells .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Presenting Data in Charts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Unit 5: Enhancing the Presentation of Data in Reports........ 149Using Breaks and Calculations... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152Using Sorts and Hiding Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Formatting Breaks and Cross Tables... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Filtering Report Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Ranking Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Tracking Data Changes ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Highlighting Information with Formatting Rules ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Contents BOW310

Organizing a Report into Sections ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219Copying and Pasting Data Blocks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Unit 6: Formatting Reports ........................................... 235Formatting Documents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236Formatting Charts.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252

Unit 7: Calculating Data with Formulas and Variables ......... 267Formulas and Variables .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269Using Formulas and Variables .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Unit 8: Using Multiple Data Sources ............................... 293Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data Sources ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Creating Multiple Queries in a Document.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299Synchronizing Data with Merged Dimensions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Using a Personal Data Provider .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313

Unit 9: Analyzing Data ................................................. 325Analyzing the Data Cube ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Drilling in an Interactive Analysis Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

Unit 10: Managing and Sharing Interactive AnalysisDocuments ............................................................... 343

Publishing Documents to the Corporate Repository .. . . . . . . . . . .345Logging in to the BI Launch Pad... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349Managing Documents in BI Launch Pad... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353Viewing an Interactive Analysis Document in BI Launch Pad..357Sharing Interactive Analysis Documents.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362Setting BI Launch Pad Preferences ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367Logging off from BI Launch Pad ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371

vi © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2011

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Course OverviewThis two-day instructor-led course is designed to give you the comprehensiveskills and in-depth knowledge needed to access, analyze and share data usingSAP BusinessObjects™BI launch pad™ and SAP BusinessObjects™ InteractiveAnalysis™.

During this course, you’ll learn how to create Interactive Analysis documentsfor your reporting needs, to retrieve data by building queries using SAPBusinessObjects universes and to use Interactive Analysis to enhance documentsfor easier analysis. You’ll also learn how to organize, manage and distributedocuments using BI launch pad.

After taking this course, you will be able to efficiently and effectively managepersonal and corporate documents to access the information you need, when youneed it. You will be able to design your own reports using Interactive Analysis andshare your analysis with other users.

Target AudienceThis course is intended for the following audiences:

• The target audience for this course is report designers who need to accessand analyze information using BI launch pad and Interactive Analysis.

Course PrerequisitesRequired Knowledge

• Not applicable for this offering.

Course GoalsThis course will prepare you to:

• Access, analyze and share data using SAP BusinessObjects InteractiveAnalysis and BI launch pad.

Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, you will be able to:

• Efficiently and effectively manage personal and corporate documents toaccess the information you and report users need.

• Design reports using Interactive Analysis and share your analysis with otherusers.

2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Course Overview BOW310

viii © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2011

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 1Introducing Interactive Analysis

Unit OverviewThis unit presents key Interactive Analysis concepts and vocabulary that areimportant to understand before beginning this course.

After completing this unit you will be able to :

• Describe Interactive Analysis concepts• Explain Interactive Analysis core functionality• Describe the relationship among SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence

platform, BI launch pad and Interactive Analysis

Unit ObjectivesAfter completing this unit, you will be able to:

• Explain how Interactive Analysis allows you to access information• Describe universes, the SAP BusinessObjects semantic layer that allows you

to query your corporate databases using your own everyday business terms• Explain how Interactive Analysis queries retrieve data from your corporate

databases• Describe the different presentation styles from which you can choose to

display the data in Interactive Analysis documents• Understand how Interactive Analysis allows you to analyze data at different

levels of detail• Describe what the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is• Explain the relationship among the SAP BusinessObjects Business

Intelligence platform, Interactive Analysis and BI launch pad• Describe the different methods available for sharing Interactive Analysis

documents with your colleagues

Unit ContentsLesson: Describing Interactive Analysis Concepts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3Lesson: Explaining Interactive Analysis Core Functionality .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

2011 © 2011 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 1: Introducing Interactive Analysis BOW310

Lesson: Describing Interactive Analysis and the SAP BusinessObjectsBusiness Intelligence Platform ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Describing Interactive Analysis Concepts

Lesson: Describing Interactive Analysis Concepts

Lesson OverviewInteractive Analysis is a tool for analyzing your organization's businessinformation. It provides access to the information that you need through the SAPBusinessObjects semantic layer.

Lesson ObjectivesAfter completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain how Interactive Analysis allows you to access information• Describe universes, the SAP BusinessObjects semantic layer that allows you

to query your corporate databases using your own everyday business terms

Business ExampleYour organization has chosen to use Interactive Analysis to query your databases,report, analyze and share key data to make business decisions. This overview ofInteractive Analysis and its semantic language supports you in your ability touse the application effectively.

Accessing Information with Interactive AnalysisWith Interactive Analysis, you can query your organization’s databases using youreveryday business terms and an easy-to-use interface. You can create simple orvery complex reports, and share the information you display with colleaguesthroughout the enterprise.

Getting the Right Information to Make DecisionsYou and your colleagues need quick, easy access to information. As part of yourjob, you make decisions all the time. That means you need the right information atyour fingertips to help you make the right decisions.

You want to access information using your everyday business vocabulary withouthaving to understand anything about the technical way the information is stored.

And once you’ve analyzed this information, you need to be able to share it withyour colleagues.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Figure 1: Interactive Analysis Core Functions

Interactive Analysis allows business users to access and analyze corporate datafrom heterogeneous data sources, online or offline. They can also share the dataand insights with colleagues, customers and partners over intranets and extranets.

The data sources include:

• Relational databases (RDBMS)• Online analytical processing (OLAP) server• Personal data providers such as Microsoft Excel or CSV files• Business Explorer (BEx) queries based on SAP Info Cubes• Web services• Advanced Analysis workspaces• The SAP High-Performance Analytical Appliance (HANA) data source

which allows you to benefit from in-memory computing

To access Interactive Analysis, you can log into the portal Business Intelligence(BI) launch pad via your internet browser. You can then create and edit InteractiveAnalysis documents and analyze the data displayed in them. Using BI launch pad,you can share documents with other users.

You can use the Interactive Analysis Desktop, a standalone Microsoft Windowsapplication that you can install on your computer. Interactive Analysis Desktoplets you continue to work with Interactive Analysis documents (WID) when youare unable to connect to the BI launch pad, when you want to perform calculationslocally rather than on the server, or when your organization chooses to deployInteractive Analysis without installing SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligenceplatform servers or an application server.

You can also use the Interactive Analysis Desktop while connected to the SAPBusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform repository. This repository isknown as the Central Management Server, or "the CMS". If you use InteractiveAnalysis Desktop while connected to the CMS, you are working in "connected"mode. In connected mode, you can export documents that you have createdlocally, so that BI launch pad users can access them in the CMS repository.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Understanding the Semantic LayerInteractive Analysis allows you to access and analyze your organization's datafrom Relational databases and OLAP servers by means of a semantic layer in oneor more SAP BusinessObjects universes. This semantic layer is a view of yourorganization's data, presented as one or more universes.

Interactive Analysis provides you access to data in other data sources, such as aBEx query or an Excel file without a universe.

Universes are based on business terminology that is familiar to you and sharedthroughout the organization so they shield users from the technical complexities ofthe databases where your corporate information is stored.

Interactive Analysis uses universes to provide access to data. Using a universe'sbusiness-oriented view of the data, you can create queries in Interactive Analysisand get information using your own everyday terms.

The terms you need to be familiar with in order to understand how this semanticlayer functions for relational databases are:

• Object• Class• Predefined query filter• Universe

ObjectObjects are elements in a universe that map to a specific set of data in a relationaldatabase. Each object in a SAP BusinessObjects universe is defined with abusiness term that is commonly used in your organization, such as Country, Year,Revenue, Customer name, Customer address, and so on.

ClassClasses are logical groupings of related objects.

This diagram shows some of the objects used in this course to build queriesand create Interactive Analysis documents, and their organization into classes.Classes are indicated here by a folder icon. The objects shown in this diagram areindicated by blue diamonds, orange rectangles, and yellow funnels.

For example, the Store class includes the objects State, City, and Store name. TheStore class also includes a subclass, called Store details, which contains otherobjects related to Stores.

Predefined Query FilterThe elements identified by yellow filters in the diagram are predefined query filters.Query filters are used to restrict the data returned by an object used in a query.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Later in this course, you will learn more about the different types of objects thatare available in universes, as well as the role of the predefined query filter inthe universe.

UniverseAn SAP BusinessObjects universe relates the objects for a business area such asfinance, sales, human resources, or purchasing departments to your organization'sdata stored in its databases.

The diagram above shows the eFashion universe which defines the objects thatyou use in this course.

Universes are created by a universe designer who is familiar with yourorganization's databases using Universe design tool. The universe designer thenmakes the universes available to you and other users in BI launch pad, the SAPBusinessObjects portal. When you create Interactive Analysis documents, you firstselect a universe to query the database where the data that interests you is stored.

Quick and Easy Access to InformationBusiness intelligence software offers tools for generating reports automaticallywhenever they are needed and provides easy analysis and querying to help withthe decision-making business process.

Many business intelligence platforms require the intervention of an informationservice to produce personalized OLAP cubes that are then used for reporting.Interactive Analysis users on the other hand, have access directly to the sourcedatabase allowing for robust query and analysis options. This helps in respondingto everyday questions and in facing problems that are present when trying tomake good decisions quickly.

The BusinessObjects business intelligence platform separates users from thecomplexity and diversity of databases and associated technologies. It usesbusiness terminology that is shared throughout the enterprise. Because it takesless time to gather information, users can concentrate on their analysis to makethe best decisions.

Figure 2: Representation of Business


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain how Interactive Analysis allows you to access information• Describe universes, the SAP BusinessObjects semantic layer that allows you

to query your corporate databases using your own everyday business terms


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Explaining Interactive Analysis CoreFunctionality

Lesson OverviewInteractive Analysis allows you to perform querying, reporting and analysis tasks,all in a single tool.


• Explain how Interactive Analysis queries retrieve data from your corporatedatabases

• Describe the different presentation styles from which you can choose todisplay the data in Interactive Analysis documents

• Understand how Interactive Analysis allows you to analyze data at differentlevels of detail

Business ExampleThis lesson provides you with an overview of core functions of InteractiveAnalysis so you can understand how your organization benefits from using theapplication.

Querying with Interactive AnalysisTo gather the data you require, you begin by creating an Interactive Analysisdocument and selecting the data source that will give you access to the appropriatedata, for example a SAP BusinessObjects universe.

Next, you use the Interactive Analysis Query Panel to add and organize theobjects that interest you from the universe you selected.

When you build a query in the Interactive Analysis Query panel, you select theuniverse objects and query filters that represent your business question. Thequery is sent to the Interactive Analysis server, if you are connected to the SAPBusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform CMS, which generates the finalStructured Query Language (SQL) statements, the language used to query thedatabase.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Explaining Interactive Analysis Core Functionality

The SQL query is then sent to the database to retrieve the data mapped to theobjects you selected. The database returns rows of data to the Interactive Analysisserver, which populates the data as a microcube, called a data provider. Thisinformation is then formatted and displayed in an Interactive Analysis report as asimple table, or even a complex chart, ready for your analysis.

An Interactive Analysis document can contain multiple reports and each reportmay have been built using different queries. Once you run the query and retrievethe data that interests you, you can structure and organize the data as you wishin the Interactive Analysis document.

Figure 3: The Interactive Analysis Query Process

Reporting with Interactive AnalysisYou can use Interactive Analysis document features to create professional reportsfrom the data you retrieve. Once you have the data you need, you can displayor present it in multiple ways:

• As a table (horizontal, vertical, form or cross table)• As a chart (bar, line, area, pie or radar)• As a multiple-block report containing large amounts of data

Analyzing with Interactive AnalysisYou can analyze your reports and switch your business perspective by draggingand dropping objects, inserting calculations, and changing the display to make theimportant information easy to see at a glance.

You can also perform multi-dimensional analysis by looking at results at a globallevel or drilling down to a more detailed level of information.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain how Interactive Analysis queries retrieve data from your corporate



levels of detail


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Describing Interactive Analysis and the SAP BusinessOb-jects Business Intelligence Platform

Lesson: Describing Interactive Analysis and theSAP BusinessObjects Business IntelligencePlatform

Lesson OverviewUsers can choose to access Interactive Analysis as a stand-alone applicationon their desktop or as a web application from within the SAP BusinessObjectsBusiness Intelligence platform portal, BI launch pad.

Interactive Analysis is part of the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligenceplatform so understanding the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligenceplatform and the function of Interactive Analysis within the platform is important.


• Describe what the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is• Explain the relationship among the SAP BusinessObjects Business



Business ExampleYou need an understanding of the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligenceplatform and how Interactive Analysis and the Business Intelligence launch padwork together.

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence PlatformOverviewSAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is a business intelligence(BI) platform that combines end-user insight with flexible systems managementfor a single BI standard. This allows administrators to confidently deployand standardize their BI implementations on a proven, scalable, and adaptiveservice-oriented architecture.

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform stores Interactive Analysisdocuments, as well as SAP Crystal reports, Desktop Intelligence documents, SAPBusinessObjects Dashboards models, Voyager workspaces, spreadsheets, andother documents. With SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform,users can access this information and organize it to suit their preferences.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


About BI Launch PadSAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform comes with BI launch pad, aweb desktop that acts as a window to a broad range of useful business informationaround your company.

BI launch pad collects and consolidates a company’s BI information and presentsit in a secure, focused, and personalized view to users inside and outside anorganization. BI launch pad lets users personalize how they view, manage, anddistribute BI content. It is both a standalone BI portal (BIP), as well as a BIcontent provider for enterprise information portals (EIPs).

Using BI launch pad, you can open existing Interactive Analysis documents andcreate new ones, using BI launch pad's Interactive Analysis report panels.

Sharing Documents with BI Launch Pad UsersBI launch pad allows you to share your documents with colleagues. You canchoose to save them as public documents, and if your colleagues are BI launchpad users, you can send your documents directly to them. The BusinessObjectsCentral Management Server (CMS) stores sent and public documents and enablesothers to retrieve them.

If they do not use BI launch pad, you can save your reports in Microsoft Excel orAdobe PDF format, so that your colleagues can easily view and print them.

Depending on how Interactive Analysis has been deployed in your organization,you can share Interactive Analysis documents in many ways:

• Save documents as files on your workstation, in Interactive Analysis WIDformat, or in Adobe PDF, Microsoft Excel, or .CSV format.

• Send in an E-mail as an attachment, in Interactive Analysis WID, AdobePDF, or Microsoft Excel format.

• Export documents to the CMS as a public or personal document.• From within BI launch pad, send a document to another user or group of

users.• From within BI launch pad, save a document as a public or personal

document in the CMS.• From within BI launch pad, schedule documents to be refreshed and sent

automatically by using the BI launch pad scheduler.

Depending on the rights assigned to you by your administrator you may be ableto schedule and view a list of your scheduled documents. When you schedule adocument you specify a time and a date to refresh it and send it to other users.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Describing Interactive Analysis and the SAP BusinessOb-jects Business Intelligence Platform

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe what the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is• Explain the relationship among the SAP BusinessObjects Business




F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Explain how Interactive Analysis allows you to access information• Describe universes, the SAP BusinessObjects semantic layer that allows you

to query your corporate databases using your own everyday business terms• Explain how Interactive Analysis queries retrieve data from your corporate



levels of detail• Describe what the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is• Explain the relationship among the SAP BusinessObjects Business




F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge

1. True or False: Interactive Analysis is a single tool for understanding,controlling and sharing business information?Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

2. What is a universe?

3. What is the core functionality of Interactive Analysis?

4. Describe three ways for sharing Interactive Analysis documents with others.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Test Your Knowledge BOW310

Answers

1. True or False: Interactive Analysis is a single tool for understanding,controlling and sharing business information?

Answer: True

True.

2. What is a universe?

Answer: A universe is the SAP BusinessObjects semantic layer that maps todata in a database and is used for creating queries in Interactive Analysis.

3. What is the core functionality of Interactive Analysis?

Answer: Querying, reporting, and analyzing data.

4. Describe three ways for sharing Interactive Analysis documents with others.

Answer: Exporting the document to the BusinessObjects CMS, sending toa user's Inbox from within BI launch pad, saving a document locally as anInteractive Analysis document (*.wid), as an Excel, or PDF file.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 2Creating Interactive Analysis

Documents with Queries

Unit OverviewThis unit describes how to use Interactive Analysis to create, edit and run queries.

Use the Interactive Analysis Desktop application for all the exercises presentedin this lesson.


• Describe the query process• Describe universes, their role and components• Describe the universes used in this course to retrieve data• Log onto the Interactive Analysis Desktop application• Create a new Interactive Analysis document• Select the data source you want to use to retrieve data• Build the query to retrieve the data that interests you• Save the new Interactive Analysis document• Add and remove objects from a query• Project the data retrieved by an added object into the report block• Describe the Query panel panes and toolbar buttons• Describe the Universe outline options• View and modify the query properties• View, copy or edit the SQL statements that generate the query

Unit ContentsLesson: Querying with Interactive Analysis .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Lesson: Creating a New Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Procedure: To Launch Interactive Analysis Desktop ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Procedure: To Choose a Universe for a New Query in InteractiveAnalysis Desktop ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 2: Creating Interactive Analysis Documents with Queries BOW310

Procedure: To Build and Run a Query in Interactive AnalysisDesktop ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Procedure: To Save a New Document Locally .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Lesson: Modifying a Document's Query .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Procedure: To Edit the Query .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Procedure: To Project Data into a Table.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Lesson: Working in the Query Panel .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Procedure: To View or Modify the Query Properties.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Procedure: To View a Query Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Querying with Interactive Analysis

Lesson: Querying with Interactive Analysis

Lesson OverviewTo retrieve new data from your corporate data sources with Interactive Analysis,you can create a new Interactive Analysis document or edit the query associatedwith an existing document.

Creating a document involves the following steps:

• Choosing the appropriate data source• Using the Interactive Analysis Query Panel to create a query that determines

which data is extracted from the database


• Describe the query process• Describe universes, their role and components• Describe the universes used in this course to retrieve data

Business ExampleThis lesson presents an overview of the query process and key concepts tounderstand for using Interactive Analysis to query your organization's databases.

About the Query ProcessThis section presents the query process from the business user's point of view.

Using one of the Interactive Analysis query panels, you construct a businessquestion, or query, that represents the information you need.

The query is sent to the Interactive Analysis server. The Interactive Analysisserver retrieves the data from the database and stores it in a microcube. Thecontents of the microcube are then formatted and displayed in an InteractiveAnalysis report in the form of tables, cross tables and charts for your analysis.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Figure 4: The Query Process from a Business User's Perspective

Universes and ObjectsInteractive Analysis makes it easy for you to access your corporate data byenabling you to work with familiar business terms rather than the technical SQLcode required to retrieve data from a database.

Interactive Analysis uses universes to achieve this. An SAP SAP BusinessObjectsuniverse is the semantic layer that maps everyday terms that describe yourbusiness environment to data stored in the database.

Using a universe, you can retrieve the data that interests you simply by draggingand dropping the desired objects.

In your company or organization, universes are created by a universe designer,using Universe design tool. The designer then makes the universes available toyou and other users in your organization so that you can select the appropriatebusiness terms to create queries and retrieve data from the database.

Within each universe, these business terms are listed as objects, while similartypes of business terms are grouped into classes.

Objects Represent a Selection of DataObjects are elements in a SAP BusinessObjects universe that correspond to thedata in the database. Ideally, the universe designer names the object with thebusiness terms that you use in your everyday activity, such as Sales revenue, orCustomer name. You use these objects to build queries and retrieve the data youwant to show in your report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Querying with Interactive Analysis

Figure 5: The Correspondence between Objects and Data

Universes Used in This CourseThe universe used in this training course, eFashion, is an example of a databasefor a company that runs a chain of retail stores.

Universes are made up of classes and objects.

Objects are elements that map to data in a relational database and are namedfor familiar business terms. For example, some of the objects in the eFashionUniverse include State, City, and Store name.

Classes are logical groupings of objects.

There are three different types of objects:

• Dimension - Retrieves the data that provides the basis for analysis in areport. Dimension objects typically retrieve character-type data, for example,customer names, store names or dates.

A blue, four-sided figure represents a Dimension in the Query Panel.

• Detail - Provides descriptive data about a dimension. A detail is alwaysattached to the dimension for which it provides additional information. Forexample, the Customer dimension could have Age and Address associatedwith it because they provide additional information about a Customer.

A blue, four-sided figure with a green star represents a Detail in the QueryPanel.

• Measure - Retrieves numeric data that is the result of calculations on datain the database. For example, Revenue is the calculation of the number ofitems sold multiplied by the item price. Measure objects are often locatedin a Measures class.

An orange rectangle represents a Measure in the Query Panel.

Universes can also include predefined query filters.

A Query Filter restricts the information returned by objects, such as limiting dataconcerning revenue to a specific year. Filters can also prompt the person viewingthe report to select a value, such as the query filter "Which product?"

A yellow funnel represents a Query Filter in the Query Panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe the query process• Describe universes, their role and components• Describe the universes used in this course to retrieve data


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Creating a New Document

Lesson: Creating a New Document

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes how to launch the Interactive Analysis Desktop applicationand how to create a new Interactive Analysis document.


• Log onto the Interactive Analysis Desktop application• Create a new Interactive Analysis document• Select the data source you want to use to retrieve data• Build the query to retrieve the data that interests you• Save the new Interactive Analysis document

Business ExampleTo design reports in Interactive Analysis, you need to know how to launch theapplication and build queries to retrieve the data your organization considersvaluable.

Launching the Interactive Analysis DesktopApplicationThe Interactive Analysis Desktop application is a locally installed MicrosoftWindows application that lets you create and edit Interactive Analysis documentsthat are stored either locally on your desktop, or in the SAP BusinessObjectsrepository.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


You can launch Interactive Analysis Desktop in one of three working modes:

• Connected mode:

Interactive Analysis Desktop is connected to the SAP BusinessObjectsBusiness Intelligence platform repository, also known as the CentralManagement Server, or CMS. You can work with documents from theBusinessObjects repository or with local documents.

In connected mode, user authentication may be handled by different securitymodels: Enterprise, LDAP, Windows AD, Windows NT, or SAP.

• Offline mode:

Interactive Analysis Desktop is not connected to the CMS repository, butapplies CMS security. You can work with local documents and universesthat are secured by the CMS you select at logon, or with unsecured localdocuments and universes.

In Offline mode, you cannot import documents from or export documents tothe CMS repository.

• Standalone mode:

Interactive Analysis Desktop is not connected to a CMS and no security isenforced. You can work with local, unsecured documents and universes only.

You cannot import documents from or export documents to a CMS.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Launch Interactive Analysis Desktop

1. From the Start menu, launch Interactive Analysis Desktop, according toyour instructor's directions.

2. Click Interactive Analysis and select Login as from the drop-down menu.

3. Select a CMS in the System list.

4. Enter a valid user name and password.

5. Select an authentication mode from the list.

Do not choose Standalone if you want to work in Connected mode. Whenyou choose Standalone authentication you work in Standalone mode, withno CMS connection.

6. Make sure the Use in Offline Mode option is not selected.

7. Click Log On.

The Interactive Analysis Desktop main window displays.

When Interactive Analysis Desktop is already running on your computer,launching it again opens a new instance of the application.

Creating a New Interactive Analysis DocumentInteractive Analysis Desktop consists of two separate panels:

• The Query Panel.• The Interactive Analysis Desktop main window.

You use these windows together to build queries and present the data returned bythe query in a report. When you are ready to save, the following information isassociated with the new Interactive Analysis document:

• The query definition.• The data returned by the query.• One or more reports.• One or more blocks of data (tables, charts) presented in the report(s), and the

formatting you have applied to the blocks.• Local variables and conditional formatting rules defined within the document.

To create a new Interactive Analysis document, you:

• Choose a data source for the query.• Build and run a query.• Save the new document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Choose a Universe for a New Query in InteractiveAnalysis Desktop

1. In the initial window in the Interactive Analysis Desktop under Choose adata source to create a new document, click Universe.

The Universe dialog box opens.

If you have already created a document or are editing an existing document,you can create a new document at any time by clicking the Create a newdocument button from the Interactive Analysis Desktop menu bar.

2. In the Universe dialog box, double-click the universe you want to use.

The Query Panel opens, showing the universe's data in the Universe outlinepanel.

You can now use the Query Panel to build queries in your document.

To build the query, move the objects you want in your report from theUniverse outline panel to the Result Objects panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Build and Run a Query in Interactive AnalysisDesktop

1. In the Query Panel Universe outline panel, when required, click the + besidea Class to display the objects in the Class.

2. Double-click each object you want to include in the query so they displayin the Result Objects panel.

To add all the objects in the class, drag the class to the Result Objects panel.

3. Repeat the previous step until the query contains all the objects you want toinclude.

4. Click Run query to run the query.

The query is executed and the Query Panel closes.

The data returned is displayed in a new document in the Interactive AnalysisDesktop main window. The values returned by the objects you selected arepresented by default in a vertical table.

Saving a New DocumentYou can save a document that you have created with Interactive Analysis Desktoplocally on your desktop or by exporting it to the CMS.

By default, the Refresh on open option is not selected so that users always see theoriginal data that was retrieved when the document was created or last refreshed,and which was stored in the document when it was saved.

To see the most recent data available in the database, users can refresh thedocument manually when they open it. Or, you can choose to select this option toensure that the data is updated automatically each time the document is opened.

If you select the Permanent regional formatting check box, it overrides the user’sdefault viewing options and always display the document’s original regionalsetting for language and time stamping.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Save a New Document Locally

1. When you are ready to save the new document locally, click the Save buttonon the toolbar.

2. Use the buttons to the right of the dialog box to navigate your file systemand control display.

3. In the Save In field, use the arrow to display and navigate to the folder whereyou want to save the document.

The contents of the folder appear in the display box below the list.

4. When you save the document as a Interactive Analysis document, type adescription and keywords for the document as required.

5. When you save the document as a Interactive Analysis document, chooseoptions:

Option Description

Refresh on open The document automatically refreshes whenit is opened.

Permanent regionalformatting

The current regional settings (locale) forformatting are applied regardless of what thelocale is on the machine where it is opened.

Save for all users All security information stored in thedocument is removed, making it accessible toall users and able to be opened in Standalonemode.

Remove documentsecurity

Default document security is removed.

6. Type a file name.

7. Select a file type.

The file type that you select filters documents shown in the display box.You can save in three formats:

• Interactive Analysis document• PDF document• Excel document

When you save as a PDF or Excel document, you cannot enter a descriptionor keywords and the Interactive Analysis Document options are unavailable.

8. Click Save.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Log onto the Interactive Analysis Desktop application• Create a new Interactive Analysis document• Select the data source you want to use to retrieve data• Build the query to retrieve the data that interests you• Save the new Interactive Analysis document


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Modifying a Document's Query

Lesson OverviewTo change the query definition, you can edit the original query that you used toretrieve data and create the document.


• Add and remove objects from a query• Project the data retrieved by an added object into the report block

Business ExampleTo adapt to the changing needs of the report users, you need to know how tomodify an existing query.

Projecting Data from an Added ObjectAfter you have created a document, you can easily change the information that isdisplayed in the resulting report by adding or removing objects in the underlyingquery.

In the Data Access toolbox, click the Edit button to open the Query Panel. Youcan then add or remove objects and predefined query filters to change the dataavailable in the document.

Then, after you run the query and return to view the report in the InteractiveAnalysis Desktop main window, you can easily move the new objects from theAvailable Objects panel into the report block by clicking and dragging them ontothe table or chart.

This process is called “projecting data”.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Modifying a Document’s Query

To Edit the Query

1. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, click the Data Accesstoolbox.

2. Click the Edit button.

The Query Panel displays.

You can change the data retrieved by this query by adding or removingobjects, changing filters, and by changing the order of the objects as theyappear in the Result Objects panel.

3. Click Run query to execute the query.

The Query Panel closes.

The new objects you added to the query now display in the InteractiveAnalysis Desktop main window in the Available Objects panel, but the valuesreturned by those objects are not yet present in the report block.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Project Data into a Table

1. When the report is empty, select a single object or a class folder in theAvailable Objects panel, and then, drag and drop the object or class ontothe report.

2. When the report already contains tables or charts and you want the new datato display in a new table or chart, drag the new object or class to an emptyarea of the report.

A new table header and body cell appears on the report. The table headerdisplays the name of the object(s).

3. To add another object to the table, drag another object from the AvailableObjects pane and place it to the left or right of a detail cell so that the left orright of the cell body is highlighted.

4. Drop the object.

A second column appears before or after the first column. The new columnheader displays the name of the object.

Note: When dragging and dropping objects onto a block, do notdrop the objects onto a column header or footer. The results do notdisplay as expected.

When the body of a cell displays as highlighted, then the object youdrag there replaces the current column with the new object's data.

Interactive Analysis displays the values in a vertical table. You can quicklyturn the vertical table to a different table format, such as a cross table byusing the Turn To feature.

5. Save the document.

Understanding How the Data is AggregatedWhen you have a report that shows Sales revenue broken down by Year andQuarter, this is an example of a high-level aggregation.

Add the Store name object to the table and Sales revenue is broken down evenfurther. All the values in the table are re-aggregated to produce a figure thatrepresents the sales revenue earned by each store this year. This is an example oflow-level aggregation.

These examples demonstrate the dynamic nature of measure objects - their valueschange depending on which dimension objects are used with them.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Modifying a Document’s Query

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Add and remove objects from a query• Project the data retrieved by an added object into the report block


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Working in the Query Panel

Lesson OverviewIn this unit you explore the remaining features available in the Query Panel.


• Describe the Query panel panes and toolbar buttons• Describe the Universe outline options• View and modify the query properties• View, copy or edit the SQL statements that generate the query

Business ExampleAs a report designer, you need a solid understanding of the Query Panel, theinformation it holds and the options it allows you to define for your queries touse it efficiently in creating documents.

The Query Panel StructureThe default display of the Query Panel consists of separate panels:

• The Data Outline panel.• The Result Objects panel.• The Query Filters panel.• The Data Preview panel.

The toolbar buttons for the panels are described in the following tables.

Edit Toolbar

Button Description

Add Query Allows you to add a new query to the document.

Data Outline Panel Allows you to show or hide the data outline, whichcontains the Master Perspective and the Display byNavigation Path views.

Filters Panel Allows you to show or hide the Query Filters panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Working in the Query Panel

Button Description

Data Preview Panel Allows you to show or hide the Data Preview panel.

Scope of AnalysisPanel

Allows you to show or hide the Scope of Analysis panel.

Add a combinedquery

Allows you to combine the data retrieved from morethan one query using one of the following operators:

• minus

• union

• intersection

Query Properties Allows you to display the query properties.

View Script Allows you to view, copy and modify the SQL scriptused to generate the query.

Run query Allows you to run the query you built and retrieve thedata from the database. The results of the query aredisplayed in a report in the Interactive Analysis Desktopmain window.

Close the query panel Allows you to close the Query Panel. The down arrowto the right of the button allows you to apply querychanges and close, or to revert the query and close.

Result Objects Panel

Button Description

Add Quick Filter Allows you to apply a filter on an object that is selectedin the Result Objects panel.

Remove Allows you to remove the selected object from theResult Objects panel.

Remove All Allows you to remove all objects from the ResultObjects panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Query Filters Panel

Button Description

Add a subquery Allows you to run a subquery to restrict the data returnedby the query.

Add a databaseranking

Allows you to use the database ranking feature toretrieve only top or bottom values from the database.

Remove Allows you to remove the selected object from theQuery Filters panel.

Remove All Allows you to remove all objects from the Query Filterspanel.

Viewing the Query PropertiesIn the Query Panel, you can view and modify the default query properties. Thequery properties allow you to:

• Limit the runtime for the query or the amount of data returned.• Set security option.• Specify the order of prompts in the report.• Control potential ambiguous query results.• Restrict the retrieval of duplicate data rows.

These query properties are available in the Query Properties dialog box.

The sections you see in the Properties tab are described in the table below.

Section Description

Name By default, each query in the document is namedsuccessively, Query 1, Query 2, and so on. You can typea name here that describes the query.

Universe This field shows the universe you chose to create yourquery. The button to the right of the Universe field allowsyou to select a new universe.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Section Description

Limits Max rows retrieved

Maximum number of rows of data that can be returnedwhen a query is run. When you only need a certainamount of data, you can set this value to limit the numberof rows of data that is returned to your document. Thisprevents a query from taking too much time or fromreturning unnecessary data to the document.

The Max rows retrieved setting can be overridden by thelimits set by your administrator in your security profile.For example, if you set the Max rows retrieved settingto 400 rows, but your security profile limits you to 200rows, only 200 rows of data will be retrieved when yourun the query.

Max retrieval time

Maximum time that a query can run before the queryis stopped. This can be useful when a query is takingtoo long due to an excess of data, or network problems.You can set a time limit so a query can stop within areasonable time.

Sample This option allows you to retrieve a random sample ofdata with your query. The sample selection occurs in thedatabase and is database-specific.

In the Sample Result set field, define the number of valuesin the sample set.

• Select the Fixed option to retrieve the same valuesat each refresh.

• Clear the Fixed option to change the values at eachrefresh.

Data Retrieve duplicate rows

This option is selected by default.

In a database, the same data may be repeated over manyrows. You can choose to have these repeated rowsreturned in a query, or to have only unique rows returned.

Retrieve empty rows

You can choose to include empty rows in query results.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Section Description

Security Allow other users to edit all queries

This option is selected by default. In this case, other userswho have the appropriate editing rights can edit the queryand modify the data contained in the document.

When you clear this option, only the report creator canmodify the query. Unlike the other query properties,which only apply to the selected query, this option appliesto all of the data providers in the document.

Prompt Order When you have applied multiple prompted query filters,you can define the order of priority that they will appearto a user refreshing this document.

Prompted query filters are presented in detail in the nextlesson.

Contexts In a few cases, your universe structure may require youto specify a context for your report. In these cases, youreceive a prompt to select a context and your selectiondetermines the dataset returned by your query.

For example, a report on sales revenue for a car dealershipcan ask you to select a rental or purchase context.Depending on your selection, your query returns salesrevenue generated by car rental or sales revenue generatedby car sales.

Your universe designer can advise you on how to selectthe appropriate context for the data that interests you.

When your query requires the report user to specify acontext, you can set the following parameters:

• Select Reset contexts on refresh to prompt for acontext at each refresh.

• Clear Reset contexts on refresh to retain the contextfrom the previous refresh.

The Clear Contexts button allows you to remove thecontext set in a previous refresh.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To View or Modify the Query Properties

1. In the Query Panel toolbar, click the Query Properties button.

2. Modify the query properties as required.

In the query properties, you can place additional restrictions on the documentrelative to the restrictions that already exist on the universe, the InteractiveAnalysis server, and the database where the data was retrieved. You cannotoverride restrictions that may already be in place.

Viewing the Query's SQLWhen you build a query, Interactive Analysis automatically generates theappropriate SQL to retrieve the data from the database that you are accessing. Youcan view and edit this SQL, and even copy and paste it to another application.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To View a Query Script

1. In the Query Panel, click View Script.

The Query Script viewer dialog box displays the SQL script behind the query.

2. Optionally, to reuse the query script in another application, click Copy tocopy the query script to the clipboard.

3. Optionally, to edit the query script, select Use custom query script.

You can now edit the query script.

4. Edit the query script, and then click Validate to ensure the syntax is correct.

5. Click Save to save the new query script.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe the Query panel panes and toolbar buttons• Describe the Universe outline options• View and modify the query properties• View, copy or edit the SQL statements that generate the query


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Describe the query process• Describe universes, their role and components• Describe the universes used in this course to retrieve data• Log onto the Interactive Analysis Desktop application• Create a new Interactive Analysis document• Select the data source you want to use to retrieve data• Build the query to retrieve the data that interests you• Save the new Interactive Analysis document• Add and remove objects from a query• Project the data retrieved by an added object into the report block• Describe the Query panel panes and toolbar buttons• Describe the Universe outline options• View and modify the query properties• View, copy or edit the SQL statements that generate the query


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What is an SAP BusinessObjects universe?

2. List the object types used in an SAP BusinessObjects universe and the kindof data returned by each object type.

3. What are the advantages of using the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication to create new documents?

4. What is the name of the interface element in the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication that allows you to build queries?

5. What must you do before you can build a query?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Select an object.□ B Select a measure.□ C Select a data source.□ D Select a database.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


6. What determines the value displayed by a measure object in a report?

7. Where do you drop the objects that retrieve the data for your query?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Data Outline panel□ B Query Filter panel□ C Result Objects panel□ D Data Preview panel


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What is an SAP BusinessObjects universe?

Answer: A universe is the SAP BusinessObjects semantic layer that mapsobjects and classes to data in a database, using everyday business terms.Interactive Analysis and other SAP BusinessObjects end-user querying toolsuse universes for creating queries.

2. List the object types used in an SAP BusinessObjects universe and the kindof data returned by each object type.

Answer:

• Dimension objects: Character-type data, dates and non-aggregatednumeric data, for example, telephone numbers. Dimensions are thekey elements of a query.

• Measure objects: Numeric- or fact-type data• Detail objects: Character- or date-type data (supplementary

information)

3. What are the advantages of using the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication to create new documents?

Answer: You can choose to work in three different operating modes:connected, offline, and standalone.You can choose to work with documents locally or to import and exportthem to and from the CMS.

4. What is the name of the interface element in the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication that allows you to build queries?

Answer: The Query Panel.

5. What must you do before you can build a query?

Answer: C

Select a data source on which to build your query.

6. What determines the value displayed by a measure object in a report?

Answer: The dimensions associated with the measure.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


7. Where do you drop the objects that retrieve the data for your query?

Answer: C

Result Objects panel is correct.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 3Restricting Data Returned by a Query

Unit OverviewThis unit describes how to set up and group query filters. Query filters allow youto limit the data returned from the underlying database and displayed in yourdocument.


• Describe the purpose of using query filters• Describe the components of a query filter• Describe the types of query filters• Modify a query by applying a predefined query filter• Create a single-value query filter• Edit a single-value query filter• Delete a query filter• Explain how to use single- and multiple-character wildcards in query filters• Create a query filter using a wildcard• Describe how prompted filters allow each user to view different data every

time the document is refresh• Create a prompted query filter• Edit a prompted query filter• Describe logical operators and how you use them in filters• Apply more than one filter using the AND operator• Apply more than one filter using the OR operator• Prioritize filters so that you are sure to retrieve the correct data

Unit ContentsLesson: Restricting Data with Query Filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Lesson: Modifying a Query with a Predefined Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Procedure: To Modify a Query with a Predefined Query Filter . . . . . . . . 56Lesson: Applying a Single-value Query Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 3: Restricting Data Returned by a Query BOW310

Procedure: To Create a Single-value Query Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Procedure: To edit a single-value query filter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Procedure: To delete a query filter .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Lesson: Using Wildcards in Query Filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Procedure: To Apply Wildcards to Query Filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Exercise 1: Restricting Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Lesson: Using Prompts to Restrict Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Procedure: To create a prompt in a report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Procedure: To Create a Prompt in a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Procedure: To Edit a Prompt Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Exercise 2: Adding Prompts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Lesson: Using Complex Filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Procedure: To create a report using the AND operator .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Procedure: To create a report using the OR operator .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Procedure: To define the priority between complex filters .. . . . . . . . . . . . 85Exercise 3: Restricting Data with Multiple Filters.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Restricting Data with Query Filters

Lesson: Restricting Data with Query Filters

Lesson OverviewRestricting queries allows you to limit the amount of data that is retrieved fromthe data source and returned to your Interactive Analysis reports. To limit thedata retrieved, you set up a query filter.


• Describe the purpose of using query filters• Describe the components of a query filter• Describe the types of query filters

Business ExampleAs a report designer you need to user query filters to provide report users withreports that present the specific data of value to them. Query filters help you todo this by removing extraneous data from a report.

The Purpose of Query FiltersQuery filters retrieve a subset of the available data, based on the definition of thefilter. For example, you can apply a query filter on the Year dimension, to viewonly Sales revenue for a specific year.

Restricting the query ensures that you retrieve only the data that interests you. Thisincreases the usefulness of your reports. It minimizes the quantity of data returnedand reduces the time required to create and refresh the document over the network.

Using query filters has the following advantages:

• You retrieve and are able to focus on only the data you need to answer aspecific business question.

• You hide data you do not want specific users to see when they access thedocument.

• You minimize the quantity of data returned to the document to optimizeperformance.

Some universes have predefined filters built into them by the universe designer.

Other times, you will want to create your own query filters to limit the data.

Users without rights to edit the query cannot modify the query filters you define.This ensures that the data saved with a document is appropriate for those who viewor analyze the data within that document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Your administrator can prevent objects from being filtered. If you create filterson these objects, when you try to run the query a warning appears listing thefilters that you cannot use. You need to remove these filters from the query inorder to run the query.

Components of a Query FilterFilters are created in the Query Filters panel of the Interactive Analysis reportpanels.

Query filters are made up of three parts:

• Object - the object on which you want to filter data.• Operator - the relationship between the object and operand. Common

operators are: Equal to, Different from, Greater than,Greater than or equal to, Less than, and Less than orequal to.

• Operand - the object values to be used for filtering.

Every filter must include an object, an operator and an operand. These elementsact together to specify what subset of the data you want to retrieve.

In the example above, the filter specifies that the query must return data wherethe Financial Year is equal to FY03-04. Data concerning any other year willnot be returned by the query.

The following is a list of operators you can choose from:

Operator Retrieves Data Example

Equal to equal to a value specified [Country] Equalto US retrieves datafor the US country valueonly.

Different from different from aspecified value

[Quarter]Different fromQ4 retrieves data for allquarters except Q4.

Greater than greater than a specifiedvalue

[Customer Age]Greater than60 retrieves data forcustomers over age 60.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



Greater than or equal togreater than or equal toa specified value

[Revenue]Greater thanor equal to10000 retrieves datafor revenue startingfrom $10000 and up.

Less than lower than the specifiedvalue

[Exam Grade]Less than40 retrieves data forexam grades below 40.

Less than or equal tolower or equal tospecified value

[Customer Age]Less thanor equal to30 retrieves data forcustomers age 30 orless.

Between between two specifiedvalues; also includesvalues specified

[Weeks] Between25 and 36 retrievesdata for weeks fromweek 25 to 36, includingweek 25 and week 36.

Not Between outside the range of thevalues specified

[Weeks] NotBetween 25 and36 retrieves data forall weeks of the yearexcluding week 25through week 36. Week25 and 36 are notincluded.

In List same as values specified [Country]In list'US;Japan;UK' re-trieves data for countriesUS, Japan and UK.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



Not in List different from multiplevalues specified

[Country]Not in List'US;Japan;UK' re-trieves data for allcountries except US,Japan and UK.

Is null for which there is novalue entered in thedatabase

[Children] Isnull retrieves datafor customers withoutchildren where Null isentered as a value forthe database under thechildren column.

Is not null for which a value wasentered in the database

[Children] Isnot null retrievesdata for customers withchildren where anyvalue is entered intothe database under thechildren column.

Matches pattern including a specificstring

[Phone] MatchesPattern,'773' retrieves datafor all phone numbersthat have '773' in them.

[Store name]Matches Pattern%Sundance retrievesdata for all stores endingin Sundance.

Different from patterndoesn't include a specificstring

[Phone]Differentfrom Pattern'773' retrieves allphone numbers that donot have '773' in them.

[Store name]DifferentFrom Pattern


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



%Sundance retrievesdata for all stores notending in Sundance.

Both corresponds to twospecified values

[Account Type]Both "fixed" and"mobile" retrievesdata for customers whohave both a fixed andmobile telephone.

Except corresponds to onespecified value anddoes not correspond toanother specified value

[Account Type]"fixed" Except"mobile" retrievesdata for customers whohave a fixed telephonebut don't have a mobilephone.

There are four types of query filters that you can use in Interactive Analysis:

• Predefined query filters - these are built right into the universe• Single and multi-value filters• Prompted filters• Complex filters


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe the purpose of using query filters• Describe the components of a query filter• Describe the types of query filters


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Modifying a Query with a Predefined Query Filter

Lesson: Modifying a Query with a Predefined QueryFilter

Lesson OverviewA predefined query filter is an element in the universe that allows you to restrictthe information returned by specific dimension, detail or measure objects.Predefined query filters are created by the universe designer and appear in thelist of classes and objects in the Query Panel. A yellow funnel icon represents apredefined query filter.


• Modify a query by applying a predefined query filter

Business ExampleUse predefined query filters to restrict the data retrieved in reports.

Using a Predefined Query Filter to Modify a QueryIn this section you learn to modify a query in the Query Panel by adding apredefined filter to the query. Like custom query filters that you define yourself,a predefined query filter allows you to limit the data returned by the query tospecific values.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Modify a Query with a Predefined Query Filter

1. Open a Interactive Analysis document.

2. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop window, click Data Access>DataProviders>Edit.


3. From the Universe outline, double-click a predefined filter or drag it to theQuery Filters panel.

4. Click Run query on the Query Panel toolbar..

Interactive Analysis sends the SQL query to the database to retrieve thedata you requested.

When the data is returned, the Query Panel closes and the data correspondingto the query filters you selected displays in a block in the Interactive AnalysisDesktop window. By default, the data displays in a table block.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Modifying a Query with a Predefined Query Filter

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Modify a query by applying a predefined query filter


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Applying a Single-value Query Filter

Lesson OverviewUse a single-value query filter to limit the data returned by an object to one value.


• Create a single-value query filter• Edit a single-value query filter• Delete a query filter

Business ExampleDefine a single-value query filter to restrict the data in your report to only thedata of value to the report users.

Creating a Single-value Query FilterWhen you add a single-value query filter to a query, you limit the data returned bya specific object to one single value.

For example, you can find data for a certain store name by building a conditionon the Store name dimension object, then selecting the name of the store you areinterested in by selecting it from the dialog box that appears.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Applying a Single-value Query Filter

To Create a Single-value Query Filter

1. In the Query Panel, select the object you want to filter and drag it to theQuery Filters panel.

The query filter appears in outline in the Query Filters panel.

2. Use the default operator (In List), and click the arrow next to the bulleted listbutton to the far right of the filter definition. This is known as the OperandType drop-down arrow. Select Value(s) from List from the list of options.

The list of values for the selected object is retrieved from the database anddisplayed in the List of Values dialog box.

3. In the List of Values dialog box, select the item you want to include in thefilter and double-click it.

An alternate way to add an item to the Select box is to select the item inthe list of values and then click the>button. To remove an item from theSelected Value(s) box, select the item you want to remove and then eitherclick the<button.

4. Click OK.

The new filter appears in the Query Filters panel.

5. Click Run query to generate a report based on your query.

Editing a Single-value FilterAfter you have run the query and reviewed the data displayed in the report, youmay decide that you want to include or restrict more values for the object youused to create the query filter.

You can make changes to the query filter by editing the query in the Query Panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To edit a single-value query filter

1. From the document, click Data Access>Data Providers>Edit.

2. In the Query Filters panel, click the Operand Type drop-down arrow andselect Value(s) from List from the list of options.

The List of Values dialog box displays.

3. Optionally, click the Refresh values button in the List of Values dialog box toupdate the display of available values in the list.

4. From the list of values, double-click the item you would like to add to thefilter. To remove an item from the Selected Value(s) box, select the itemand click the<button.

5. Click OK.

The query filter appears in the Query Filters panel showing the filter's object,operator and operand.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Applying a Single-value Query Filter

To delete a query filter

1. From the document, click Data Access>Data Providers>Edit.

2. In the Query filters panel, click the filter that you want to delete.

3. Press the Delete key on your keyboard.

Alternatively, to delete a query filter, you can use one of the followingmethods:

Note:

• Click and drag the filter to the Universe outline panel.• Click the Remove button on the Query Filters panel toolbar.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Create a single-value query filter• Edit a single-value query filter• Delete a query filter


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using Wildcards in Query Filters

Lesson: Using Wildcards in Query Filters

Lesson OverviewYou can use wildcards in query filters to search for partial values rather than theentire value. For example, you can retrieve “all product categories that beginwith B.” To do this, you need to use wildcards as placeholders for partial patternsearches.


• Explain how to use single- and multiple-character wildcards in query filters• Create a query filter using a wildcard

Business ExampleUsing wildcards in query filters allows you to restrict data to values that containa certain character-pattern. Your understanding of wildcards gives you greaterflexibility in specifying the criteria for the data that displays when you use queryfilters.

About WildcardsWildcards are special characters that denote any single character or any number ofcharacters. In Interactive Analysis, use the following wildcards:

• _ for any single character• % for any number of characters

Understanding the Single-character WildcardTo look for the product categories of either SHIRTS or SKIRTS, use the patternS_IRTS. This pattern specifies that the values retrieved must:

• Be six characters long• Have S as the first character and IRTS as the final four

The _ means that there can be a single unspecified character between the S andthe IRTS.

Understanding the Multiple-character WildcardTo look for any product category that begins with the letter B, use the pattern B%.This pattern specifies that the values retrieved must have B as the first character.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


The % means that the B can be followed by an unspecified number of characters.

Creating a Query Filter with a WildcardYou can use wildcards as placeholders for partial pattern searches. When youcreate the query filter using a wildcard, you must use one of the followingrelational operators:

• Matches pattern: to find values that match the pattern you specify.• Different from pattern: to find values different than the pattern you specify.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Apply Wildcards to Query Filters

1. In the Query Panel, drag the object you want to use to build a filter into theQuery Filters panel.

2. Click the Operator Type drop-down arrow, and select Matches pattern fromthe drop-down menu.

3. Click the filter definition text box and type the wildcard pattern you want touse.

4. Click Run query.

The report displays data reflecting the wildcard you entered.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 1: Restricting Data

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Create a query filter to limit the data returned by objects in a query• Edit the query filter to change the data returned by objects in a query

Business ExampleThe eFashion store managers want to focus on the sales revenue performanceof the eFashion stores that they manage personally and not be distracted byextraneous data from the stores their colleagues manage. Create a report usingquery filters to present only the data that interests them.

Task:Create a report to show sales revenue by year, quarter and store name and add aquery filter to display the data for specific stores.

1. Create a new document with a report showing Sales Revenue by Year,Quarter and Store name.

2. Create a query filter to show data for the store eFashion Dallas.

3. Run the query to view your results.

4. Replace the filter to display figures only for eFashion New York Magnoliaand eFashion New York Sundance.

You need to change the filter operator. The Equal to operator can only returna single value.


6. Save the document as Activity Filters 1 and close the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 1: Restricting DataTask:Create a report to show sales revenue by year, quarter and store name and add aquery filter to display the data for specific stores.

1. Create a new document with a report showing Sales Revenue by Year,Quarter and Store name.

a) From the initial Interactive Analysis Desktop screen, in the Choosea data source to create a new document area, under Universe, clickeFashion.

b) Under the Time period class, double-click Year and Quarter so theyappear in the Result Objects panel. You can also drag the objects tothe Result Objects panel.

c) Extend the Store class to display the objects that it contains.

d) Double-click Store name so it appears in the Result Objects panel. Youcan also drag the object to the Result Objects panel.

e) Extend the Measures class to display the measures that it contains.

f) Double-click Sales revenue so it appears in the Result Objects panel.You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

2. Create a query filter to show data for the store eFashion Dallas.

a) When the Query Filters panel does not display, in the Query Paneltoolbar, click the Filters Panel button.

b) From the Universe outline, drag the Store name object to the QueryFilters panel. You can also drag the object from the or from the ResultObjects panel.

c) In the query filter, click the arrow to the right of the operator field andselect Equal to.

d) Click the button to the right of the operands field.

e) In the drop-down menu, click Value(s) from list.

f) In the List of Values dialog box, double-click eFashion Dallas.

g) Click OK.


a) Click Run query.

4. Replace the filter to display figures only for eFashion New York Magnoliaand eFashion New York Sundance.

Continued on next page


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


You need to change the filter operator. The Equal to operator can only returna single value.

a) Click the Data Access toolbox

b) On the Data Providers tab, click Edit.

c) In the query filter, click the arrow to the right of the operator field andselect In list.

d) Click the button to the right of the operands field.

e) In the drop-down menu, click Value(s) from list.

f) In the List of Values dialog box, click Refresh values.

g) To remove eFashion Dallas from the Selected value(s) area, select thevalue and click the arrow button that points away from the area.

h) To add the new values, select eFashion New York Magnolia, press theCtrl key on your keyboard and select eFashion New York Sundance.

i) Click the arrow button that points toward the Selected value(s) area.


a) Click Run query.

6. Save the document as Activity Filters 1 and close the document.

a) Click Save.

b) In the File name field, type the name of the document.

c) Click Save.

d) In the upper right-hand corner of the Report Panel, click the Closebutton.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain how to use single- and multiple-character wildcards in query filters• Create a query filter using a wildcard


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using Prompts to Restrict Data

Lesson: Using Prompts to Restrict Data

Lesson OverviewA prompt is a query filter that requires the report user to select the data valuesthat the query returns at each refresh. You can design a prompt to allow users tomanually enter data or to select data from a list of values.


• Describe how prompted filters allow each user to view different data everytime the document is refresh

• Create a prompted query filter• Edit a prompted query filter

Business ExampleA prompted query filter empowers the report users to determine the data they wantto view at each document refresh and flexibly adapt the report according to theirneeds at a given moment. When you create a report with a prompted query youcan satisfy multiple needs in a singe report.

Prompted FiltersThe prompt dialog box allows you to specify the data to retrieve and display in thereport. Consequently, you can focus on a specific part of the information available.

Prompted filters allow multiple users viewing a single document to specify adifferent subset of the data and display it in the same tables and charts in the report.

You can use a prompted filter to define a question that is displayed whenever thedata in the document is refreshed. Users can answer the prompt either by typingor by selecting values.

For example, you can use the prompted query filter to produce a report that showssales revenue per state and prompts the user to select a product category at eachrefresh.

This way, you do not restrict the data displayed to a single product category, suchas Jewelry. Instead, the users select the product category that interests them atthat moment.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Prompts can be defined on any dimension, measure or detail object listed in theUniverse outline in the Query Panel.

Note: You cannot use the operators Is Null and Not Null whencreating prompted filters.

Creating a Prompted Query FilterTo create a prompted query filter, you use the Prompt operand.

After you select the Prompt operand, click the Parameter Properties buttonbetween the Prompt text field and the Operand type button to open the ParameterProperties dialog box, where you can define query filter settings.

The Parameter Properties dialog box settings are described in this table:

Option Description

Prompt text Type the text that you want to promptthe user to select a value. This textappears each time the document isrefreshed.

Prompt with List of Values Select this option to display all thevalues for the object and allow the userto select from those values.

Select only from list Select this option to prevent users fromtyping values that do not exist in thedatabase.

Keep last values selected Select this option to display by defaultthe value selected at the previousrefresh. The user can change the valueor refresh using the previously selectedvalue.

Optional prompt Select this option to allow usersto refresh the document withoutresponding to the prompt or byresponding only partially to theprompt.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Option Description

When the user does not respond to theprompt, the query filter is not appliedto the data.

Set default values Select this option to define the defaultvalue(s) that appear in the prompt.

Define the default value(s) using oneof the following methods:

• In the Type a value field, type thevalue(s). Use the arrow to movethe value(s) to the field on theright.

• Click the Values button to choosethe value(s) from the list ofvalues present in the database.

Some important points about prompted query filters:

• When the document contains multiple data providers, and there is alreadya prompt that includes (1) objects with the same data type, (2) operators ofthe same operator type, and (3) the same prompt text as the new prompt,Interactive Analysis displays a warning to tell you that the two prompts willbe merged. This means that whenever all the data providers are refreshed, asingle prompt message will appear for the two prompts.

• When you make a prompt optional, the prompt dialog box displays text toinform report users that when they do not provide a value for the prompt, thefilter does not apply.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To create a prompt in a report

1. In the Query Panel, drag the object on which you want to apply a promptto the Query Filters panel.


2. Click the Operand Type drop-down arrow and select Prompt from the menu.

3. Click the Parameter Properties button between the Prompt text field and theOperand type button to open the Parameter Properties dialog box, whereyou can define query filter settings.

4. Click OK to confirm the prompt.

5. Click Run query.

The Prompts dialog box opens.

6. Select the value by which you want to filter the report, and move it to theSelected Values area.

7. Click Run query.

The document displays, reflecting the prompt value you selected.


Prompts Dialog BoxThe options you define for the prompt determine how the Prompts dialog boxdisplays to the report consumers and how they can specify the values for theirreports in the Prompts dialog box.

The dialog box displays all the prompts for the report in the Prompts Summary.The report consumer clicks the prompt to display the prompt and define thecorresponding values.

The Prompts Summary also indicates when a prompt is optional.

When the Prompts dialog box displays a list of values from which the report userscan select the values for the report, it also displays the last refresh date and timefor the list of values. With this information, report users can determine when torefresh the list of values.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Prompt in a Report

1. In the Query Panel, drag the object on which you want to apply a promptto the Query Filters panel.



3. Click the Parameter Properties button between the Prompt text field and theOperand type button to open the Parameter Properties dialog box, whereyou can define query filter settings.

4. Click OK to confirm the prompt.

5. Click Run query.

The Prompts dialog box opens.

6. Select the value by which you want to filter the report, and move it to theSelected Values area.

7. Click Run query.

The document displays, reflecting the prompt value you selected.


Editing a Prompted Query FilterAfter you have run the query and reviewed the data displayed in the report, youmay decide that you want to change the prompt to include or restrict more valuesfor the object you used to create the query filter.

You can make changes to the prompted query filter by editing the query in theQuery Panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Edit a Prompt Filter

1. In the Query Panel, in the Query Filters panel, click the Operator drop-downarrow to display the operators, and select the appropriate operator from thelist.

When you modify the value for the operator, you lose the operand for thefilter.


3. Optionally, to edit the prompt properties, click the Parameter Propertiesbutton next to the Prompt text field.

4. Optionally, to edit the prompt text, type new text in the Prompt text field.

5. Optionally, to set default prompt values, click Set default values.

You can type default values into the Type a Value field and move them intothe selected values box by pressing the>button, or you can click Valuesto open the List of Values dialog box, where you can select default valuesfrom the list of values.

After selecting default values in the List of Values dialog box, click OK toclose the List of Values dialog box and return to the Parameter Propertiesbox.

6. Optionally, select or deselect other Parameter Properties as appropriate.

7. Click OK.

8. Click Run query to display the new Prompts dialog box.

The value you specified is presented by default in the Prompt zone. You canaccept the default value or specify another value.

9. Click Run query.


The next time it is opened the report will display data concerning the valueyou selected as the default. When the user decides to refresh the data, theprompt dialog box allows the user to select another value.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 2: Adding Prompts

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Limit the data returned by objects in a query by applying prompts to a filter• Create a prompt filter to limit the data returned by objects in a query• Edit the prompt filter parameters

Business ExampleReport consumers want to be able to specify for which store(s) a report returnssales data when they refresh the report. You create a report with a promptand define the appropriate prompt parameters to satisfy the report consumers’requirements.

Task:Create a report to show quantity sold by state, store name and Year with a promptto allow the report users to specify the state. Use the parameter properties todefine the prompt display and function.

1. Create a new document to retrieve Quantity sold by State, Store name, andYear.

2. Add a prompted filter to the query to prompt report users to select the Stateeach time they run the query or refresh the document.

3. Run the query to view your results selecting Florida as the State.

4. Change the prompted filter parameters so that the document does not keepthe last value selected in the prompt, only allows report consumers to specifyvalues by selecting them from the list in the prompt, allows report consumersto run the query without specifying values in the prompt

5. Run the query without providing state values to show the results.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 2: Adding PromptsTask:Create a report to show quantity sold by state, store name and Year with a promptto allow the report users to specify the state. Use the parameter properties todefine the prompt display and function.

1. Create a new document to retrieve Quantity sold by State, Store name, andYear.


b) Extend the Store class to display the objects that it contains.

c) Double-click State and Store name so they appear in the Result Objectspanel. You can also drag the objects to the Result Objects panel.

d) Under the Time period class double-click Year so it appears in the ResultObjects panel. You can also drag the object to the Result Objects panel.


f) Double-click Quantity sold so it appears in the Result Objects panel.You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

2. Add a prompted filter to the query to prompt report users to select the Stateeach time they run the query or refresh the document.

a) When the Query Filters Panel does not display, in the Query Paneltoolbar, click the Filters Panel button.

b) From the Universe outline, drag State to the Query Filters panel. Youcan also drag the object from the Result Objects panel.

c) In the query filter, click the Operand type button and, from thedrop-down menu, select Prompt.

3. Run the query to view your results selecting Florida as the State.

a) Click Run query.

b) Double-click Florida in the State list.

c) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


4. Change the prompted filter parameters so that the document does not keepthe last value selected in the prompt, only allows report consumers to specifyvalues by selecting them from the list in the prompt, allows report consumersto run the query without specifying values in the prompt

a) Click the Data Access toolbox.


c) In the Query Panel, in the Query Filters panel click the ParameterProperties button to the right of the prompt text.

d) In the Parameter Properties dialog box, deselect Keep last valuesselected and select both Select only from list and Prompt optional.

e) Click OK.

5. Run the query without providing state values to show the results.

a) Click Run query.

b) Click OK.

Notice that the query retrieves the data for all states.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe how prompted filters allow each user to view different data every

time the document is refresh• Create a prompted query filter• Edit a prompted query filter


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using Complex Filters

Lesson: Using Complex Filters

Lesson OverviewTo further refine the information returned to a document, you can apply more thanone filter to a query. first you need to create the query filters and then determinehow to apply them to the query:


• Describe logical operators and how you use them in filters• Apply more than one filter using the AND operator• Apply more than one filter using the OR operator• Prioritize filters so that you are sure to retrieve the correct data

Business ExampleComplex query filters allow you to use multiple criteria to restrict the data thatappears in your report and satisfy the specific needs of the report users.

Using Logical Operators for Multiple ConditionsTo produce a report that focuses more precisely on certain data, you may need toapply more than one filter. When you specify more than one filter in a query, therelationship between the filters must use either the AND or OR operator. Theseare known as logical operators.

• The AND operator is used when both conditions defined in the two filtersmust be met for a row to be returned from the database when you run a query.

• The OR OR operator is used when either one or the other of the conditionsdefined in the filters must be met for a row to be returned from the databasewhen you run a query.

The result of combining two or more filters can be visually represented usinga Venn diagram.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Figure 6: Filter Operators

The two circles each represent the number of database rows that are returned basedon the conditions defined by a particular filter. Note that the two overlap. Thisarea represents the rows that meet the conditions defined by both filters.

As shown in the diagram, using the AND logical operator results in only rowsrepresented by Area C being included in a report. On the other hand, if you use theOR logical operator, all rows represented by Circles A and B will be returned. Thefollowing sections demonstrate these points.

Using the AND OperatorWhen you add a second filter to a query, Interactive Analysis automatically placeseither an AND operator between the two conditions. You saw this behavior whenyou added the predefined filter to your query in the last practice activity.

However, when your query had a second filter that you removed from the queryand you add a new second filter, by default, Interactive Analysis applies the logicaloperator that was last used. You can switch the operator value between AND andOR by double-clicking it. or an OR operator


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To create a report using the AND operator

1. Create a new query and drag the required objects to the Result Objects panel.

2. Select an object on which you want to filter the query, and drag it to theQuery Filters panel.

3. In the operator drop-down list, select the appropriate operator for the filter.

4. Click the Operand Type drop-down arrow, and click Value(s) from list.

The values available for the object are displayed in the List of Values dialogbox.

5. Select the appropriate values from the list and move them to the SelectedValue(s) zone.

6. Click OK.

The Query Filters panel displays the filter you just defined.

7. Create a second query filter by dragging another object to the Query Filterspanel.

8. From the Operator drop-down list, select the appropriate operator.

9. Click the Operand Type drop-down arrow, and click Value(s) from list.

The values available for the object are displayed in the List of Values dialogbox.

10. Select the appropriate values from the list.

11. Click OK.

Interactive Analysis automatically applies the AND operator the first timeyou create a second filter.

The OR operator appears when there was previously a second filter separatedby the OR operator. Click the operator to change it to AND .

12. Click Run query.


Using the OR operatorWhen you use the AND operator to group two query filters, your report returnsdata only if the conditions of both query filters are met. When you use the ORoperator to group two query filters, your report returns data if the conditions ofeither of the query filters are met. For this reason, the OR operator returns moredata than the AND operator.

By double-clicking an operator, you can switch its value between AND and OR.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To create a report using the OR operator

1. Create a new query and drag the required objects to the Result Objects panel.

2. Select the objects on which you want to build the filters and drag them to theQuery Filters panel.

Note: The query must use at least two query filters to use the ORoperator.

3. From the Operator drop-down list, select the appropriate operators for eachof the query filters.

4. Select the appropriate Operands and values for the query filters.

5. Group the query filters as required.

6. When required, click the operators grouping the query filters to switchbetween the operator values AND and OR.

7. Click Run query.

The report displays according to the query filter grouping you created.


Prioritizing OperatorsYou are applying a complex filter when you combine several filters in a singlequery. To ensure that the filters retrieve exactly the data you want, you need toprioritize the operators.

In the Query Filters panel, by positioning the query filter statements and decidinghow to group them together, you define which filters will be processed first. Thepositioning and grouping of the filters depends on the logic of the information youare trying to retrieve.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To define the priority between complex filters

1. Create a query in the Query Panel.

The query must use several query filters, which you will need to group andprioritize.

2. In the Query Filters panel, drag and drop the query filters in the order youwant them to display in your report.

Drag a query filter on top of another one to group the filters together.Double-click the operator names to switch them between AND and OR tocreate the desired priority.

The grouping of the query filters, represented by the brackets, determineswhich query filters will be processed first:

3. Click Run query.

The report displays according to the filter grouping you created.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 3: Restricting Data with MultipleFilters

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Create multiple filters to limit the data returned by objects in a query• Apply the appropriate operator for the multiple filters

Business ExampleReport consumers want to view the sales data for the eStores where margin islow and profit is relatively high. You create a report with multiple query filtersto satisfy their criteria.

Task:Use multiple filters in a query to retrieve data for stores where margin below$1,000,000 and sales revenue is above $2,000,000.

1. Create a new document showing Store name and Sales revenue whereMargin is less than $1,000,000.

Note: Do not use commas in the numerical notation when creatingthe filter.

2. Run the query to show the results.

3. Edit the query and add a query filter to show only store names that also havea sales revenue of more than $2,000,000.

Note: Apply the appropriate operator (AND/OR) to retrieve the datathat meets your criteria.


5. Save the report as Activity Filters 3 and close the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 3: Restricting Data with MultipleFiltersTask:Use multiple filters in a query to retrieve data for stores where margin below$1,000,000 and sales revenue is above $2,000,000.

1. Create a new document showing Store name and Sales revenue whereMargin is less than $1,000,000.

Note: Do not use commas in the numerical notation when creatingthe filter.



c) Double-click Store name so it appears in the Result Objects panel. Youcan also drag the object to the Result Objects panel.

d) Extend the Measures class to display the measures that it contains.

e) Double-click Quantity sold so it appears in the Result Objects panel.You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

f) Double-click Margin so it appears in the Result Objects panel. You canalso drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

g) From the Universe outline, drag the Margin measure to the QueryFilters panel. You can also drag the measure from the Result Objectspanel.

h) In the query filter, select the operator Less than.

i) In the operands field, type 1000000.


a) Click Run query.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


3. Edit the query and add a query filter to show only store names that also havea sales revenue of more than $2,000,000.

Note: Apply the appropriate operator (AND/OR) to retrieve the datathat meets your criteria.



c) From the Universe outline, drag the Sales revenue measure to theQuery Filters panel. You can also drag the measure from the ResultObjects panel.

d) In the query filter, select the operator Greater than.

e) In the operands field, type 2000000.

f) Apply the AND operator.


a) Click Run query.

5. Save the report as Activity Filters 3 and close the document.

a) Click Save.


c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe logical operators and how you use them in filters• Apply more than one filter using the AND operator• Apply more than one filter using the OR operator• Prioritize filters so that you are sure to retrieve the correct data


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Describe the purpose of using query filters• Describe the components of a query filter• Describe the types of query filters• Modify a query by applying a predefined query filter• Create a single-value query filter• Edit a single-value query filter• Delete a query filter• Explain how to use single- and multiple-character wildcards in query filters• Create a query filter using a wildcard• Describe how prompted filters allow each user to view different data every

time the document is refresh• Create a prompted query filter• Edit a prompted query filter• Describe logical operators and how you use them in filters• Apply more than one filter using the AND operator• Apply more than one filter using the OR operator• Prioritize filters so that you are sure to retrieve the correct data


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What are some advantages of using query filters to restrict data in queries?

2. Which of the following are components of a query filter?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Operator□ B Object□ C Dimension□ D Operand□ E Predefined

3. What types of query filters can you apply to a query?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Complex query filters□ B Quick query filters□ C Single-value query filters□ D Standard query filters□ E Predefined query filters

4. Which logical operators must you use when you apply more than one filter?


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What are some advantages of using query filters to restrict data in queries?

Answer: You limit the amount of data retrieved by the database and,consequently, can reduce both processing and refresh time. You can specifyprecisely the data that interests you.

2. Which of the following are components of a query filter?

Answer: A, B, D

Operator, Object and Operand

3. What types of query filters can you apply to a query?

Answer: A, C, E

Complex, Single-value and Pre-defined are query filter types.

4. Which logical operators must you use when you apply more than one filter?

Answer: Queries that contain multiple filters use logical operators (AND/OR)to combine the filters and to create specific querying scenarios.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 4Designing Interactive Analysis

Reports

Unit OverviewIn this unit, you see how to present the information that you have learned toretrieve in building the queries for your reports.


• Describe the components of an Interactive Analysis document• Describe the different toolboxes, tabs, and toolbars available in the

Interactive Analysis Desktop• Customize your user settings• Display the Document Properties and describe the options• Insert, delete, duplicate and move reports within an Interactive Analysis

document• Describe the table types available in Interactive Analysis• Create vertical, horizontal, cross and form tables• Create a table by selecting a template• Change table types• Add data into an existing table• Duplicate an existing table• Delete tables, rows or columns• Insert a blank cell in a report• Display the date that the document was last refreshed• Display text to help report consumers view key data• Format and align the new cells in the report• Describe the chart types available in Web Intelligence• Create a chart• Create a chart from a table• Feed a chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 4: Designing Interactive Analysis Reports BOW310

Unit ContentsLesson: Working with Interactive Analysis Documents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Procedure: To Change Application Modes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101Procedure: To Set User Preferences in Interactive AnalysisDesktop ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Procedure: To Change Your Password... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106Procedure: To Change the Left Panel Display.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109Procedure: To view and modify document properties .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112Procedure: To Add a Report to a Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Lesson: Displaying Data in Tables... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115Procedure: To Create a Default Vertical Table.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Procedure: To Create a Table by Selecting a Template .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Lesson: Working with Tables ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121Procedure: To Change a Table Format .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122Procedure: To Add Data to an Existing Table.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123Procedure: To Duplicate a Table .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124Procedure: To Delete Table Rows or Columns ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Lesson: Presenting Data in Free-standing Cells .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127Procedure: To Insert a Free-standing Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128Procedure: To Change the Default Number Format .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129Procedure: To Insert Text to Label the New Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130Procedure: To Modify the Default Text style in Multiple CellsSimultaneously.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Lesson: Presenting Data in Charts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133Procedure: To Create a Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136Procedure: To Create a Chart from a Table.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137Procedure: To Change a Chart into a Table .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138Exercise 4: Designing Interactive Analysis Reports .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Working with Interactive Analysis Documents

Lesson: Working with Interactive Analysis Documents

Lesson OverviewThis lesson introduces you to the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window. Thisinterface allows you to view, edit, structure and analyze the information returnedby the queries that you build in the Query Panel.

The Interactive Analysis Desktop main window offers three different applicationmodes which grant you access to specific features. Your license type and yoursecurity profile together determine the features to which you have access.


• Describe the components of an Interactive Analysis document• Describe the different toolboxes, tabs, and toolbars available in the


document

Business ExampleThe Interactive Analysis Desktop main window allows you to analyze the dataretrieved in your query and to present the data in a way that calls attention to thekey information that the report users want to consult. A good understanding ofthe various features within the interface allows you to make the most efficientuse of them.

Components of an Interactive Analysis DocumentA Interactive Analysis document consists of:

• One or more reports

One document may contain several reports, organized as tabs along thebottom of the window. Reports contain blocks of formatted data as well astext and graphics. You specify the layout when you create a report, and youcan also change the layout of existing reports.

• One or more blocks

A block is a table, cross table, form, or chart that displays information inthe report.

• The microcube of data returned by the query, or other data provider


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


The microcube contains the actual data that was retrieved from yourcorporate database. The microcube is the structure in which the retrieveddata is stored in the document. It contains all the data that you can display inthe report(s) inside the document.

The reports display in the Report Panel area of the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication main window. The data that you can use in your reports displaysin the Left Panel.

Viewing Reports in a DocumentEach report in a document can show different views of the same information, or itcan show completely different information concerning the same subject.

About the Interactive Analysis Desktop ReportingInterfaceAs you view an Interactive Analysis document, the Interactive Analysis Desktopmain window allows you to interact with and organize the data returned by queriesthrough:

• The Left Panel that provides different views of the current document.• The toolboxes, toolbars and buttons that allow you to control the data that

displays in the Report Panel.

The toolboxes, tabs and toolbars for interacting with the data in the reportthat are available to you depend on the application mode you use to workin the Interactive Analysis Desktop application.

• When you right-click the report elements in the Report Panel, the contextualmenu also gives you quick access to the functions available for the elementin the application mode you use to work in the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication.

As a report designer, you work principally in the Design mode. However, thereport users may work principally in the Reading mode so you need to be familiarwith the features available in the other modes.

The table below provides a description of the features available in the differentapplication modes. The description corresponds to the standard delivery of theInteractive Analysis Desktop. The security profile that your system administratorhas defined for you can further restrict your access.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


ApplicationMode

Features

Data In Data mode you can create, edit and manage queries thatsupply data to reports.

Data mode provides access to the Data Access toolbox withfeatures that allow you to:

• Create a new document• Edit, purge and refresh an existing document• Create a new variable• Merge objects from different data sources

Data mode also provides you access to:

• The File tab with the main toolbar where you can open,save, print and search a document and send it as anattachment by E-mail.

• The Properties tab where you can set document andapplication properties.

Reading In Reading mode, you can view and perform some analysistasks on reports. When you open an existing report, itdisplays in Reading mode.

Reading mode provides you access to the main toolbar thatallows you to:

• Create a new document• Open, save, print, search a document• Send a document as an E-mail attachment• Edit a document with copy, cut, paste, undo and redo

buttons• Refresh a document• Activate data change tracking, drill up or down in the

data in a report designed for drilling• Show or hide report filters and outlines

Design In Design mode, you have access to the features availablein Data and Reading modes and additional analysis andformatting features.

Design mode provides you access to the following toolboxesand their associated functions:


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


ApplicationMode

Features

• Report Element: Allows you to define the tables, charts,cells and sections in which your data displays, thecolors, position and alignment of the report elementsand the hyperlinks they contain.

• Format: Allows you to define formatting optionsincluding font, color, borders, text alignment, paddingand background images.

• Data Access: Allows you to create a new document,edit, purge and refresh an existing document, createa new variable and merge objects from different datasources.

• Analysis: Allows you to perform extensive analysistasks.

You can apply report filters, ranking, input controls, datatracking, breaks, sorts, conditional formatting rules,drill up or down on data when drilling is enabled, applycalculations and show or hide outlines.

• Page Setup: Allows you to add, delete, rename,duplicate and move reports, define page orientation,headers, footers and margins and scale a report to anumber of printed pages,

Design mode also provides you access to:

• The File tab with the main toolbar that allows you toopen, save, print and search a document and send it asan attachment by E-mail.

• The Properties tab that allows you to set document andapplication properties.

Changing Application Modes


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change Application Modes

1. From the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, depending on thecurrent mode, follow the appropriate instructions to change the applicationmode:

When you arein:

Do the following to change to a new mode:

Readingmode Click the arrow button pointing to the right >> in the

upper right-hand corner and, from the menu, select theapplication mode to which you want to change.

Data orDesign mode Click the application mode button in the upper right-hand

corner for the mode in which you want to work.

Customizing Your User PreferencesYou can personalize the following settings of the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication in the User Preferences dialog box. The dialog box organizes thepreferences on different tabs:

• General: General preferences• Viewing: Document viewing preferences• Locale: Preferences for interface and formatting locales and how to use them• Drill: Document drill preferences• Proxy: Proxy settings for hosts and ports

Interactive Analysis Desktop General PreferencesThis section describes the general user preferences that you can define for yourwork in the Interactive Analysis Desktop application.

Select Default UniverseWhen you define a default universe, the Universe dialog box displays with thedefault universe selected each time you create a new document on a universe. Youcan use the default universe or select another one.

• No default universe means that no universe in the list is preselected whenyou open the Universe dialog box. You must select a universe from the listwhen creating a document.

• Select a universe.... option allows you browse for a default universe. Afteryou define the default universe, its name displays here.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Select Default FoldersIn this section, you choose the default folders in which to store user documents,universes, and help files. To change the default locations, click Browse, thenbrowse to and select a folder.

When Interactive Analysis Desktop is downloaded and installed from BI launchpad, help files are not installed locally. However, they are installed on the BIlaunch pad server. Contact your company's SAP Business Objects administrator toget the URL of the help files on the server, then enter the URL here for help tobe available.

Select Microsoft Excel FormatIn this section you choose the format to use when you save a document inMicrosoft Excel format.

• Prioritize easy data processing in the Excel document: the Excel documentwill be formatted to ensure efficient data processing.

• Prioritize the format of reports in the Excel document: the Excel documentwill be formatted to ensure optimum readability.

Interactive Analysis Desktop Viewing PreferencesThis section describes the viewing user preferences that you can define for yourwork in the Interactive Analysis Desktop application.

Measurement UnitIn this section, you set the unit of measurement for report display: pixel, inch,or centimeter.

GridIn this section you set grid options:

• Show grid: When this is selected, a grid displays to help align page elements.• Snap to grid: When this is selected, page elements align to the grid to enable

accurate repositioning.• Grid spacing: This defines the distance between lines on the grid.

Interactive Analysis Desktop Locale PreferencesThis section describes the locale user preferences that you can define for yourwork in the Interactive Analysis Desktop application.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


LocalesA locale is a combination of language and geographical area.

• Product locale: Select an available locale to set the application interfacelanguage. When you change this setting, you must restart InteractiveAnalysis Desktop for the change to be taken into account.

• Preferred viewing locale: The user's preferred locale for displaying documentdata. When a user creates a document, the preferred viewing locale is alwaysassigned as the initial Document locale saved with the document.

Formatting LocaleThis option determines how Interactive Analysis formats the data in yourdocuments.

• Use the document locale to format the data: When this is selected, data isformatted according to the document locale. The document locale can besaved with the document by means of the permanent regional formattingoption that you can select when saving.

• Use the preferred viewing locale to format the data: When this is selected,data is formatted according to your preferred viewing locale preference.This overrides the document locale.

Interactive Analysis Desktop Drill PreferencesStart Drill SessionIn this section, you choose how to start a new drill session:

• Start drill on duplicate report: When you start a new drill session, a duplicatereport is opened in the document and you drill on the duplicate. When youend drill mode, both the original report and the drilled report remain in thedocument.

• Start drill on existing report: When you start a new drill session, the currentreport becomes drillable. When you end drill mode, the report displays thedrilled values.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Drill Options

• Prompt when drill requires additional data: You are prompted whenInteractive Analysis needs to retrieve additional data to complete the drill,and can decide whether to go ahead. If the amount of data is large, theretrieval can take time and you may decide not to drill. When this optionis not selected, Interactive Analysis retrieves the additional data withoutprompting you.

• Synchronize drill on report blocks: When this is selected, drilled values areshown in all the report blocks in the report. When it is not selected, drilledvalues are shown only in the report block selected for the drill.

• Hide drill toolbar on startup: When this is selected, the drill toolbar thatis normally displayed at the top of drilled reports is not shown. The drilltoolbar displays the value on which you drilled. It is only useful when youwant to select filters during your drill session.

Proxy OptionsDefine the proxy settings when you use an internet proxy server to access URLsor images in your reports. You do not need to define proxy settings for imagesembedded in a report.

Use the proxy settings defined within your internet browser to define your proxysettings in the Interactive Analysis Desktop application.

• Http Host and Port Settings: Type the appropriate proxy information ineach field.

• Https Host and Port Settings: When the https proxy settings are the same asthe http proxy settings, select same as Http Proxy. When they are different,type the appropriate proxy information in the fields.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Set User Preferences in Interactive AnalysisDesktop

1. Use the instructions for the application mode in which you are working:

• From Reading mode, click the button with two arrows pointing to theright >> in the upper right-hand corner and, in the display of buttons,click the Tools button.

• From Data or Design mode, click the Tools button.

A drop-down list displays.

2. Click Options.

The User Preferences dialog box displays.

3. Click the tab that corresponds to the options you want to define:

• General: to set general preferences• Viewing: to set document viewing preferences• Locale: to set preferences for interface and formatting locales and how

to use them• Drilling: to set document drill preferences• Proxy: to set proxy host and port

4. Set preferences and click OK.

The preferences are now applied. They are stored in a file in theLocData folder under the SAP BusinessObjects BusinessIntelligence installation folder.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change Your PasswordUseYou can only change your password from Interactive Analysis Desktop if you arein client-server connection mode: you must have launched Interactive AnalysisDesktop locally rather than from BI launch pad.

Procedure1. Use the instructions for the application mode in which you are working:

• From Reading mode, click the button with two arrows pointing to theright >> in the upper right-hand corner and, in the display of buttons,click the Tools button.

• From Data or Design mode, click the Tools button.

A drop-down list displays.

2. Click Change Password.

4. Type your current password in the Enter Old Password field.

5. Type your new password in the Enter New Password field.

6. Type your new password again in the Confirm New Password field.

7. Click OK.

ResultYour password is changed to the new password.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Interactive Analysis Application StructureThe Interactive Analysis application has the following components in Designmode:

• The File and Properties tabs

The File tab contains the toolbar that allows you to open, save and printdocuments.

The Properties tab allows you to set document and application propertiesand to determine the display of the different components and panels in theapplication.

• Toolboxes

Toolboxes appear at the top of the application and provide access to tabs andtoolbars that allow you to perform related tasks. The toolboxes include:Report Element, Format, Data Access, Analysis, Page Setup.

• The Left Panel

The Left Panel contains several panes that provide different views of thecurrent document.

• The Status Bar

The Status Bar appears beneath the report and allows you to activate datatracking or change the way the report displays between Quick Display andPage modes


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Working with the Left Panel ViewsThe Left Panel in the Design mode of the Interactive Analysis Desktop mainwindow groups several panes that provide different views of the current document.

• The Document Summary provides an overview of the document properties.You can print or edit the properties using the buttons at top of the DocumentSummary.

• The Report Map lists all the reports in the document displayed in the ReportPanel. You can navigate among the reports and report sections via the ReportMap.

• The Input Controls pane allows you to add and edit input controls appliedto the document.

• The Web Services Publisher pane lists the BI Services published from thedocument.

• The Available Objects pane lists the data providers and objects available forbuilding your reports.

• The Document Structure and Filters pane displays the structure of thedocument in a tree view and displays the filters applied to the differentreport elements.

In Data mode, only the Data pane appears in the Left Panel. The Data pane allowsyou to navigate the data providers in a document.

In Reading mode, only the Document Summary, the Report Map and the InputControls pane appear in the Left Panel, but the report user cannot modify theinformation in the panes.

By default, when the results of a query display in the Report Panel the Left Paneldisplays the Available Objects view. You can change the view by clicking thebuttons to the left of the view or by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the nameof the active view to display the views available.

For a better view of the Report Panel, you can close the Left Panel by clicking thearrow <<button in the upper right-hand corner of the view or In the Propertiestab, click View>Left Panel>Minimize.

To display the Left Panel again, click the button for the view you want to see.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change the Left Panel Display

1. Open an Interactive Analysis document in the Interactive Analysis Desktopmain window.

By default, the Left Panel tab displays the Available Objects pane in the inthe Interactive Analysis Desktop main window. This tab displays the title ofthe document, plus all the objects (and variables, when pertinent), availablein this document.

2. Click one of the buttons to the left of the Available Objects pane to displaythe corresponding view.

The Left Panel displays the new pane.

3. Drag the right edge of the Left Panel to the middle of the Interactive AnalysisDesktop main window to expand the panel.

4. Click the arrow << button in the upper right-hand corner of the view to closethe Left Panel for a better view of the contents of the Report Panel.

5. To display the Left Panel again, click the button for the view you want to see.

Displaying the Document SummaryIn the Left Panel of the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, you candisplay and modify properties that are assigned by default to the InteractiveAnalysis document.

The document properties options are described in the following table.

Document Summarysection Description

General Displays details about the document, such as thetitle, who created the document, the creation date,keywords that were defined to identify the document,and a description.

Locale

Displays the document’s international formattinglocale. The locale affects the behavior of, forexample, date display, number display and sortorder. For example, if the document formatting


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



locale is French (France), decimal numbers appearaccording to French formatting rules with a commaas the decimal separator (3,51;20,05).

Statistics Displays details about the last refresh, the durationof the last refresh, the last modification to thedocument and the username of the person who madethe modification.

Document Options Displays the document options available andwhether they are activated for the current document.

Enhanced viewing

Optimizes the document appearance for on-screenviewing.

Refresh on open

Refreshes a document automatically each time auser opens it.

By default, this option is not selected so that usersalways see the original data that was retrieved whenthe document was last refreshed, and which wasstored in the document when it was saved. To seethe most recent data available in the database, userscan refresh the document manually when they openit. Or you can choose to select this option to ensurethat the data is updated automatically each time thedocument is opened.

Permanent regional formatting

Bases document formatting on the document'slocale. The document maintains the formatting forits locale even when a viewer defines a differentlocale. You can select this option here or in the Savea document dialog box when you save the document.

Use query drill

Drills in query drill mode, instead of in the standarddrill mode.

Enable query stripping


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



Enhances performance during query refresh bygenerating queries that only retrieve the data for theobjects that contribute to the reports in which theyare used. At each query refresh, Interactive Analysisignores the non-contributing objects and retrievesonly the relevant data from the data provider.

Data Options Data tracking

When activated, displays the date of the referencedata set for tracking change in data.

Auto-merge dimensions

Synchronizes data providers by merging dimensionsautomatically under certain conditions.

Extend merged dimension values

Extends dimension values in reports withsynchronized data providers.

Parameters Provides the document prompts and keydates.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To view and modify document properties

1. To view the document properties, click the Document Summary button to theleft of the Left Panel.

The Left Panel displays again to show the Document Summary pane.

To view all the properties displayed in the pane, click the arrow next to theproperty header to expand or collapse a section and use the vertical scroll bar.

2. Optionally, to modify the document properties, click Edit at the top of theDocument Summary pane.

The Document Summary dialog box displays.

3. Make changes in the Document Summary dialog box and click OK.

Note: You cannot modify all document properties in the DocumentSummary dialog box. For example, to activate or deactivate datatracking, you must use the Track Changes button on the Status Baror the Data Tracking tab in the Analysis toolbox.

Managing ReportsIn the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, you can add new reports to adocument, and duplicate or delete reports as you like.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Add a Report to a Document

1. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, right-click a report tab atthe bottom of the document and select Add Report.

A new empty report tab, called Report 2 is inserted in the document anddisplays at the bottom of the document.

2. Right-click the Report 2 tab and select Rename.

The Rename dialog box displays.

3. In the New value field, type the name you want to give the report and clickOK.

The report tab displays the new name for the report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe the components of an Interactive Analysis document• Describe the different toolboxes, tabs, and toolbars available in the


document


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Displaying Data in Tables

Lesson: Displaying Data in Tables

Lesson OverviewThe simplest style for displaying data is tables. Interactive Analysis providesdifferent types of tables, including: vertical, horizontal or financial tables, crosstables and forms.

This lesson presents the different table types and how you create tables withdifferent formats to display your data.


• Describe the table types available in Interactive Analysis• Create vertical, horizontal, cross and form tables• Create a table by selecting a template

Business ExampleAs a report designer, you need to know the different ways of displaying the dataretrieved by queries and to choose the ones that are most appropriate to the datathat is important to the report users. This lesson presents how to display datain tables.

About TablesVertical TablesThe vertical presentation style is the default style for presenting data. Verticaltables display header cells at the top of the table and the corresponding data incolumns. By default, the header cells display the names of the dimensions, details,and measures included in the table. The body cells display the correspondingvalues.

Horizontal Tables or Financial TablesA horizontal or financial table is similar to a vertical table except that the dataruns horizontally rather than vertically. By default, the row headers display thenames of the dimensions, details, and measures included in the table. The bodycells display the corresponding values. This table format is useful for reports withseveral measures, such as financial reports and balance sheets.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Cross TablesA cross table looks similar to a spreadsheet and displays data in a matrix with rowand column headings describing the content of each cell. Cross tables are mostcommonly used to show the cross-section of three axes of information.

Cross tables display values for dimensions across the top axis and on the left axis.The body displays the values of a measure that correspond to the cross-sectionof the dimensions.

FormsForms are useful in a report if you want to display detailed information percustomer, product, or partner. For example, a form is a useful way of displayingindividual customer records with information such as the customer account, name,and address. Forms are also useful for formatting address labels for envelopes.

Viewing Tables in Different Display ModesWhen you first create a new document by building and running a query, the dataretrieved is generally displayed in a vertical table.

By default, all documents display in the Quick Display mode. This display modemakes large documents with many rows and columns of data easier to handlebecause you can limit the number of rows and columns per page in your document

Quick display mode displays 100 rows and 20 columns per page. You can increasethese values, as required.

You can insert one or more tables into a blank report or even add them to anexisting report. To insert a table:

• Drag the objects (from the Available Objects view) for which you want thetable to display values onto a blank area of the report - this is a fast way tobuild simple, vertical tables.

• Use the table buttons in the Report Elements toolbox on the Table tab. Youselect the table type that you want to insert and use the Insert report elementdialog box to assign the objects to the table.

In the Interactive Analysis Desktop window, you can make modifications todocuments and preview those changes in Quick Display and Page modes.

View Page mode displays the results retrieved in a page layout with margins,headers and footers.

You change between Quick Display and Page modes by clicking the QuickDisplay or Page buttons in the Status Bar.

In Design mode, you can also choose to work with the report structure only. Nodata appears in the table. Working with the report structure only allows you tomake modifications without accessing the server. When you work with reports


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


populated with data, each change you make is applied on the server. When youwant to make many modifications, a best practice is to work with the reportstructure only, and to populate the report with data when you have finished yourmodifications.

To work in Structure mode, click the drop-down arrow beside Design in the upperright-hand corner and select Structure only.

Inserting Tables in a ReportThe default view of new reports is a vertical table so you have already createdvertical tables. As a refresher, this scenario walks you through creating one morevertical table.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Default Vertical Table

1. Create a new query.

2. Click Run query.

Your results display in a vertical table.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Table by Selecting a Template

1. In an existing document, select the mode in which you want to work byclicking Design>Structure only or Design>With Data.

Working in Structure mode allows you to define and preview the new tablewithout requesting the server to apply each of your modifications. You thenapply all of your modifications and display the results in the new table bychanging to With Data mode.

2. Click the Report Elements toolbox.

3. On the Tables tab, click the drop-down arrow beside one of the insert tablebuttons for the table type you want to insert and select the define table menuitem for the table type.

For example, to insert a horizontal table, click Define Horizontal Table.

4. In the report, click the area where you want the table to appear.

The Insert report element dialog box displays and shows the table typeselected. The field(s) for the axis or axes available in the table display tothe right.

5. For each axis field, click the drop-down arrow and select the object for whichyou want the data to display.

To add table rows, columns or body cells, click + to the right of the axis field.

To delete table rows, columns or body cells, click the drop-down arrow tothe right of the + and select Delete.

6. Click the OK.

The table displays the data from the objects you selected.

7. To add another object to the table and create an additional table column orrow, drag an object from the Available Objects pane to the area of the tableyou want to add the column or row, as follows:

• To create a new column before the existing column, drop the objectonto the left of a column.

• To create a new column after the existing column, drop the object ontothe right of a column.

• To create a new row above the existing row, drop the object onto thetop edge of a row.

• To create a new row below the existing row, drop the object onto thebottom edge of a row.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe the table types available in Interactive Analysis• Create vertical, horizontal, cross and form tables• Create a table by selecting a template


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Working with Tables

Lesson: Working with Tables

Lesson OverviewThis lesson describes how to modify the display of information in tables.


• Change table types• Add data into an existing table• Duplicate an existing table• Delete tables, rows or columns

Business ExampleAs a report designer you need to know how to modify the tables you created todisplay data in reports. This lesson presents the different modifications you canmake and shows you how to make them.

Changing Table FormatsWith Interactive Analysis, you can switch from one table format to another,when you feel that a certain table style is more appropriate for the informationdisplayed in the report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change a Table Format

1. Right-click the table you want to modify.

The contextual menu displays.

2. Click Turn into.

A menu of table and chart types displays.

3. Click the table type to which you want to change the table.

Interactive Analysis displays the data in a new table type.

Adding Data to an Existing TableYou can add data to your tables simply by dragging objects from the AvailableObjects pane.

When the new data object was not part of your original query and not retrievedfrom the database, you need to edit your query, add the data object in the QueryPanel to the Results Object panel and run the query before you can add the objectto an existing table.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Add Data to an Existing Table

1. Drag the object you want to add to the table from the Available Objects pane,and drop the object where you want to add it:

• To add the object into a new column to the left of an existing column,drag the object onto the left edge of a column header.

• To add the object into a new column to the right of an existing column,drag the object onto the right edge of a column header.

• To add the object into a new row before an existing row, drag the objectonto the top edge of a row header.

• To add the object into a new row after an existing row, drag the objectonto the bottom edge of a row header.

The name of the object appears in the new column or row header, and thevalues appear in the new body cells.

Duplicating TablesYou can use the copy-and-paste method that you prefer to easily copy a table andpaste it as another block in the report. This is useful in order to show the samedata, but in another format, perhaps as a chart with formatting to highlight certaininformation.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Duplicate a Table

1. Use your preferred method for duplicating a table:

Methods of duplicating a table

Method Steps

Context-sensitive menu 1. Right-click the table and, from the contextual

menu, select Copy.2. Place your cursor where you want the duplicate

table to appear. Right-click and select Paste.

Toolbar buttons1. Click the table to select it. and in the toolbar above

the Left Panel click the Copy button.2. Place your cursor where you want the duplicate

table to appear and click the Paste button.

Keyboardshortcuts 1. Click the table to select it and on your keyboard,

click Ctrl + C.

Place your cursor where you want the duplicatetable to appear and, on your keyboard, click Ctrl+ V.


Deleting Tables, Rows, or ColumnsDeleting tables, rows, or columns can easily be accomplished using a shortcutmenu.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete Table Rows or Columns

1. Right-click the table, column, or row you want to remove and select Deletefrom the contextual menu.

The Row, Column, or Table is deleted.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Change table types• Add data into an existing table• Duplicate an existing table• Delete tables, rows or columns


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Presenting Data in Free-standing Cells

Lesson: Presenting Data in Free-standing Cells

Lesson OverviewFree-standing cells are single cells that stand alone in a report. You can usefree-standing cells to display information that adds meaning to your report, such as:

• Text comments: Type messages or questions or add titles. As a reportdesigner you can add tips to the report consumers on how they can use thereport interactivity for additional information.

• Images: display logos, icons or photographs.• Formulas or calculations: Add custom formulas or calculations.• Last refresh date: Display the date when the document results were refreshed

with the most recent data from the database.• DrillFilter functions: Display the names of the objects by which the data

on a drilled report is filtered.• Page numbers: Display the page number of each report page.


• Insert a blank cell in a report• Display the date that the document was last refreshed• Display text to help report consumers view key data• Format and align the new cells in the report

Business ExampleFree-standing cells can help you present the data in the report clearly and addinformation that helps report users in interpreting the data accurately. This lessonshows you how to use free-standing cells.

Inserting a Free-standing CellIn the Report Element toolbox, there are several different types of free-standingcells available on the Cell tab.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Insert a Free-standing Cell

1. In the Report Element toolbox, click the Cell tab.

The Cell tab displays with the Blank button for inserting a blank free-standingcell and the Pre-defined menu of pre-defined cells.

2. Click the drop-down arrow beside Pre-defined to display the menu ofpre-defined cells, including:

• Document name• Last Refresh Date• Drill Filters• Query Summary• Prompt Summary• Report Filter Summary• Page Number• Page Number/Total Pages• Total Pages

3. From the Cell tab, click the free-standing cell template you want to use andclick the area in the report where you want it to display.

The cell displays in the report.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change the Default Number Format

1. In the report, right-click the cell that contains the number for which you wantto change the default number format.

2. Click Format Number in the contextual menu.

The Format Number dialog box displays.

3. Click the tabs to the left of the Format Number to display the sample formatsof the number types in the Sample area.

4. Click the sample format with the format you want for the number in theselected cell.

5. Click OK.

The cell format is updated in the report.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Insert Text to Label the New Cell

1. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, click the Report Elementtoolbox.

2. Click the Cell tab.

3. Click Blank and click the area in the report where you want the blank cell todisplay.

An empty cell displays in the report.

4. Double-click the new cell.

A dialog box opens with your cursor in the field that allows you to entertext or a formula.

6. Type the appropriate label text in the field and press the Return key.

The text appears in the cell you just created.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Modify the Default Text style in Multiple CellsSimultaneously

1. Select the cells to which you want to apply the same formatting. Click onecell, on your keyboard press Ctrl and click the second cell.

2. Click the Format toolbox.

3. Click the appropriate tab in the Format toolbox and use the buttons and fieldsin each tab to define the formatting you want to apply to the cells.

The tab names indicate the aspect of the formatting that they allow you todefine:

• Font: To define font size and type.• Border: To define borders and border color• Cell: To merge or clear cells• Style: To display the font in bold, italics or underlined and to define the

font color. Also to define the cell background or color.• Numbers: To format numbers.• Alignment: To define the alignment of the text.• Size: To define cell size.• Padding: To define the spacing between the cell contents and the cell

borders.

The cells and their contents display with the formatting changes.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Insert a blank cell in a report• Display the date that the document was last refreshed• Display text to help report consumers view key data• Format and align the new cells in the report


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Presenting Data in Charts

Lesson: Presenting Data in Charts

Lesson OverviewInteractive Analysis offers standard chart formats to graphically display yourbusiness information. You can select among many chart types in InteractiveAnalysis, including various forms of column, line, pie, bar and point charts.


• Describe the chart types available in Web Intelligence• Create a chart• Create a chart from a table• Feed a chart

Business ExampleInteractive Analysis also has multiple chart types that allow you to present thedata in your reports graphically and in a way that presents the data in a clear andcomprehensive manner. This lesson presents the different chart types and how towork with charts.

Column ChartsColumn charts are useful for showing data changes over a period of time or forillustrating comparisons among items. Column charts display a series as a ofvertical bars that are grouped by category. Interactive Analysis provides thefollowing column charts:

• Column chart• Column chart with dual values• Combined column and line chart• Combined column and line chart with dual value axes• Stacked column chart• 100% stacked column chart• 3D column chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Line ChartsLine charts are good for showing trends in data at equal intervals or changesin data over time. Line charts connect specific data values with lines, eitherhorizontally or vertically. Interactive Analysis provides the following line charts:

• Line• Line with Dual Axes• Surface Chart

Pie ChartsPie charts are useful if you want to show how each part of your report datacontributes to the total. Pie charts display data as segments of a whole. You canonly include one measure object in a pie chart. When you have several measuresin your report, choose another chart type. Interactive Analysis provides thefollowing pie charts:

• Pie chart• Pie chart with variable slice depth• Donut chart

Point ChartsPoint charts are useful for comparing specific data points. They display data aspoints and are similar to line graphs, except that the data points are plotted withouta line to connect them. Interactive Analysis provides the following point charts:

• Scatter chart• Bubble chart• Polar scatter chart• Polar bubble chart

Bar ChartsBar charts are useful for comparing similar groups of data; for example one timeperiod to another. Bar charts display data in bar form, horizontally. InteractiveAnalysis provides the following bar charts:

• Bar chart• Stacked bar chart• 100% stacked bar chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Radar ChartsRadar charts, also known as spider charts, are useful when you want to look atseveral different factors related to one item. A radar chart displays several axesstarting from a unique origin and with a common scale. Each axis representsan analysis category item. Plots are directly placed on an axis according to theassociated values. Plots can be linked by lines.

For example, you could use a radar chart to display revenue data for differentservices within a hotel. On one axis, you could display revenue for the rooms; onanother you could display revenue for the restaurant, and so on.

Creating a ChartYou can create charts in the following ways:

• In the Report Element toolbox, you can click a chart type from the Chartor Others tab and click the area of the report where you want the chart todisplay. The chart structure displays in the report.

• You can use the right-click contextual menu option. Right-click the reportand select Insert>Insert a Report Element. Next, click the area of the reportwhere you want the chart to display. The chart structure displays.

• Use the right click contextual menu on an existing table or crosstable. Right-click the table or cross table and select Turn Into>MoreTransformations.

Note: You can also choose to work with the report structure only whenyou create charts. No data appears in the chart. Working with the reportstructure only allows you to make modifications without accessingthe server. When you work with reports populated with data, eachchange you make is applied on the server. When you want to makemany modifications, a best practice is to work with the report structureonly, and to populate the report with data when you have finished yourmodifications.

To work in Structure mode, click the drop-down arrow beside Design inthe upper right-hand corner and select Structure only.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Chart

1. In an existing document, click the Report Element toolbox.

2. On the Chart tab or Other tab, click the drop-down arrow beside the buttonsfor the different chart types and select the chart type you want to create.

3. Click the area of the report where you want to display the chart.

The chart structure displays in the report.

4. Drag the required objects to the chart.

The data for the objects display in the chart.


Creating a Chart from a TableThis section explains how to change a table to a chart. You can also use the stepsbelow to change from one table type to another or to change one chart type toanother.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Chart from a Table

1. Right-click the table you want to change into a chart and, from the contextualmenu, select Turn Into>More Transformations

Alternatively, when the chart you want to create is in the menu, such asColumn, Line or Pie, you can select the chart directly.

The Turn Into dialog box displays.

2. On the left side of the Turn Into dialog box, click the tab for the chart typeyou want to create.

3. In the area where the charts display, click the chart that you want to create.

4. In the area to the right of the Turn Into dialog box, you see the objects forthe different aspects of the chart, for example, the value axis, category axis,region color, pie chart size and color.

When required, you can modify the values by clicking the arrow beside thefield and selecting an new object. You can add a field by clicking + besidethe field. You can delete a field by clicking the X beside the field.

5. Click OK.

The chart displays the data.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change a Chart into a Table

1. Right-click the chart you want to change into a table and, from the contextualmenu, select Turn Into>More Transformations.

Alternatively, when the table you want to create is in the menu, for exampleVertical Table, Horizontal Table or Cross Table, you can select the tabledirectly.

The Turn Into dialog box displays.

2. On the left side of the Turn Into dialog box, click the Tables tab.

3. In the area where the table types display, click the table that you want tocreate.

4. In the area to the right of the Turn Into dialog box, you see the objects in thefields for the different axes in the table, for example, the horizontal axis,vertical axis and body axis.

When required, you can modify the values by clicking the arrow beside thefield and selecting an new object. You can add a field by clicking + besidethe field. You can delete a field by clicking the X beside the field.

5. Click OK.

The chart displays in the selected format.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 4: Designing Interactive AnalysisReports

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Create multiple reports in one document• Create a vertical table• Create a horizontal table• Create a form table• Create a cross table• Create a vertical grouped bar chart• Create a 3D Column Chart• Create a form table

Business ExampleThe report consumers in your organization want different views of data relating tothe organization’s personnel. You create a document with multiple reports that usedifferent table and chart formats to display the data effectively.

Task:Create a new document, insert new reports in the document and create tables andcharts to display the data in the reports.

1. Create a new document using all the objects in the eSTAFF universe.

2. Delete the vertical table from the report.

3. Insert five additional reports in the document.

4. In Report 1, create one vertical table that shows Store and Total Salary andanother vertical table that shows Store and Number of Employees.

5. In Report 2, create a horizontal table with Store, Store Code, and Number ofEmployees. Create the horizontal table.

6. Place the objects in the horizontal table

7. In Report 3, create a table that shows Employee Name, Gender, Store Code,Job Description, Personnel Number, and Address.

8. Display the data in a Form.

9. In Report 4, create a table that shows Employee Name, Job Description,and Total Salary.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


10. Change the table into a cross table.

11. Ensure that Employee Name appears as the column header, Job Descriptionappears as the row header and Total Salary values appear in the table body.

12. In Report 5, create a vertical grouped bar chart that shows Number ofEmployees, and City.

13. In Report 6, create a 3D Column Chart that shows Region and Number ofEmployees.

14. Save the document as Activity Tables & Charts and close the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 4: Designing Interactive AnalysisReportsTask:Create a new document, insert new reports in the document and create tables andcharts to display the data in the reports.

1. Create a new document using all the objects in the eSTAFF universe.

a) From the initial Interactive Analysis Desktop screen, in the Choose adata source to create a new document area, click Universe.

b) In the Universe dialog box, double-click eSTAFF.

c) Click the Employee class, press the Ctrl key on your keyboard and clickthe Measures class to select both classes.

d) Drag the classes into the Result Objects panel so all the objects andmeasures contained in the classes appear in the Result Objects panel.

e) Click Run query.

2. Delete the vertical table from the report.

a) Click the table to select it.

b) On the toolbar, click Delete.

3. Insert five additional reports in the document.

a) Right-click the Report 1 tab and, from the contextual menu, selectAdd Report.

b) Repeat steps a and b until a total of 6 Report tabs display in yourdocument.

4. In Report 1, create one vertical table that shows Store and Total Salary andanother vertical table that shows Store and Number of Employees.

a) Click Store and press the Ctrl key on your keyboard.

b) Click Total Salary.

c) Drag the object and measure to the area of the report where you wantthe table to display.

d) Click Store and press the Ctrl key on your keyboard

e) Click Number of Employees.

f) Drag the object and measure to the area of the report where you wantthe table to display.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


5. In Report 2, create a horizontal table with Store, Store Code, and Number ofEmployees. Create the horizontal table.

a) Click the Report Element toolbox

b) Click the Table tab.

c) Click the arrow to the right of the Insert Horizontal Table button andselect Define Horizontal Table.

d) Click the area in the report where you want the table to display.

6. Place the objects in the horizontal table

a) In the Insert a report element dialog box, under Vertical Axis, click Pickto display the objects retrieved in the query.

b) Click Store.

c) Click the + (plus) button to the right of the field where Store displaysto add a new vertical axis.

d) Click Pick to display the objects retrieved in the query.

e) Click Store Code.

f) Click the + (plus) button to the right of the field where Store Codedisplays to add a new vertical axis

g) Click Pick to display the objects retrieved in the query.

h) Click Number of Employees.

i) Click OK.

7. In Report 3, create a table that shows Employee Name, Gender, Store Code,Job Description, Personnel Number, and Address.

a) Click Employee Name and press the Ctrl key on your keyboard.

b) Click Gender, Store Code, Job Description, Personnel Number andAddress.

c) Drag the objects to the report.

8. Display the data in a Form.

a) Right-click the table and, from the contextual menu, select Turn Into> More Transformations.

b) Click the Form option.

c) Under Vertical Axis, check that the objects appear in the order in whichyou want them to display.

d) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


9. In Report 4, create a table that shows Employee Name, Job Description,and Total Salary.

a) Click Employee Name and press the Ctrl key on your keyboard.

b) Click Job Description and Total Salary.

c) Drag the objects to the area of the report where you want the tableto display.

10. Change the table into a cross table.

a) Right-click the table and click Turn Into > Cross Table.

11. Ensure that Employee Name appears as the column header, Job Descriptionappears as the row header and Total Salary values appear in the table body.

a) When an object is not in the correct position, click a cell that displaysthe data returned by the object and drag the object to the area of thetable where you want the data to appear.

12. In Report 5, create a vertical grouped bar chart that shows Number ofEmployees, and City.

a) In Report 5, click the Report Element toolbox.

b) Click the Chart tab.

c) Click the Insert Column Chart button.

d) Click the area in the report where you want the chart to display.

e) Drag the City object to the chart.

f) Drag the Number of Employees measure to the chart.

13. In Report 6, create a 3D Column Chart that shows Region and Number ofEmployees.

a) In Report 6, click the Report Element toolbox.

b) Click the Chart tab.

c) Click the arrow next to the Insert Column Chart button to display thedrop-down menu.

d) Click 3-D Column.

e) Click the area in the report where you want the chart to display.

f) Drag the Region object to the chart.

g) Drag the Number of Employees measure to the chart.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


14. Save the document as Activity Tables & Charts and close the document.

a) Click the Save button.


c) Click Save.

d) In the upper right-hand corner of the Report Panel, click the Closebutton


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe the chart types available in Web Intelligence• Create a chart• Create a chart from a table• Feed a chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Describe the components of an Interactive Analysis document• Describe the different toolboxes, tabs, and toolbars available in the


document• Describe the table types available in Interactive Analysis• Create vertical, horizontal, cross and form tables• Create a table by selecting a template• Change table types• Add data into an existing table• Duplicate an existing table• Delete tables, rows or columns• Insert a blank cell in a report• Display the date that the document was last refreshed• Display text to help report consumers view key data• Format and align the new cells in the report• Describe the chart types available in Web Intelligence• Create a chart• Create a chart from a table• Feed a chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What are the three components of an Interactive Analysis document?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Objects□ B Reports□ C Blocks□ D Filters□ E Microcube

2. Which application mode allows you access to the greatest number oftoolboxes and their related features?

3. Which of the following table types can you create in an Interactive Analysisdocument?Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Horizontal (Financial)□ B Bar□ C Vertical□ D Cross table□ E 3D□ F Form

4. To change a table type:Choose the correct answer(s).□ A Use the toolbar buttons in the Format toolbox.□ B Right-click the table and select Turn Into from the contextual

menu.□ C Delete the existing table and create a new one from a template.□ D Drag the table to the Available Objects pane.

5. Where in the Interactive Analysis main window, do you find chart templates?


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What are the three components of an Interactive Analysis document?

Answer: B, C, E

Reports, blocks and the data microcube

2. Which application mode allows you access to the greatest number oftoolboxes and their related features?

Answer: Design mode

3. Which of the following table types can you create in an Interactive Analysisdocument?

Answer: A, C, D, F

Horizontal (or Financial), Vertical, Cross table, Form

4. To change a table type:

Answer: B

Right-click the table and select Turn Into from the context-sensitive menu.

5. Where in the Interactive Analysis main window, do you find chart templates?

Answer: In the Report Element toolbox, on the Chart and Other tabs.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 5Enhancing the Presentation of Data

in Reports

Unit OverviewAs you edit the reports in an Interactive Analysis document, several tools can helpyou to perform analysis of the data and to structure and enhance reports so that thereports show exactly the information you need in the clearest way possible.


• Apply breaks to structure long tables of data into smaller groups• Apply calculations, such as sums and counts• Explain the different sort orders available in Interactive Analysis• Apply sorts to display data in the order of importance of the information• Create custom sorts• Hide data and show hidden data• Manipulate break headers and footers to change the display of the data• Prioritize multiple breaks in a table• Format cross tab headers• Explain the differences between using query filters and using report filters• Explain the operators available for report filters• Create the different report filter types• Explain the difference between report filters and input controls• Apply a ranking to show top values• Understand how data tracking helps you monitor data• Activate data tracking• Set the reference data set• Format the data changes• Explain how to use conditional formatting to highlight important information• Build a formatting rule• Define the format displayed by the formatting rule


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 5: Enhancing the Presentation of Data in Reports BOW310

• Apply conditional formatting• Build complex formatting rules• Break a report into sections• Insert a sum and position it using drag and drop• Insert a chart in each section• Copy a block of data into a target application• Copy an image of a data block into a target application

Unit ContentsLesson: Using Breaks and Calculations ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Procedure: To Organize a Report with Breaks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Procedure: To delete breaks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155Procedure: To Organize a Report with Calculations ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156Procedure: To Delete a Calculation ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Lesson: Using Sorts and Hiding Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159Procedure: To Create a Default Sort. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162Procedure: To Create a Custom Sort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163Procedure: To Hide Dimensions in Tables ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165Procedure: To Show Hidden Dimensions in Tables... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166Procedure: To Hide or Show a Table, Column or Row ... . . . . . . . . . . . . .167Procedure: To Show Hidden Tables, Cells or Sections... . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

Lesson: Formatting Breaks and Cross Tables ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Procedure: To View and Modify Default Break Settings... . . . . . . . . . . . .173Procedure: To Set the Priority of Multiple Breaks in a Table.. . . . . . . . .175Procedure: To Format Additional Header Rows... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176Procedure: To Center the Objects in the Column Header in a CrossTable.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177Exercise 5: Formatting Breaks and Cross Tables ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

Lesson: Filtering Report Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183Procedure: To Create a Simple Report Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185Procedure: To Delete a Simple Report Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186Procedure: To Create a Standard Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187Procedure: To Delete a Standard Report Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188Procedure: To Filter with Input Controls .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189Procedure: To Delete Input Controls.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

Lesson: Ranking Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192Procedure: To Apply Ranking to a Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193Procedure: To Remove Ranking from a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194Exercise 6: Enhancing the Presentation of a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Lesson: Tracking Data Changes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200Procedure: To Activate Data Tracking ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202Exercise 7: Tracking Data Changes ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Lesson: Highlighting Information with Formatting Rules... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207Procedure: To Create a Single Condition Formatting Rule .. . . . . . . . . .209


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Unit 5: Enhancing the Presentation of Data in Reports

Procedure: To Apply Conditional Formatting Rules... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211Procedure: To Create a Multiple Condition Formatting Rule .. . . . . . . .212Exercise 8: Creating a Complex Formatting Rule.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213

Lesson: Organizing a Report into Sections ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219Procedure: To Create a Section ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220Procedure: To Display an Aggregate ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221Procedure: To Insert a Block in Each Section ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222Procedure: To Navigate from Section to Section... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223Procedure: To Delete a Section ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Lesson: Copying and Pasting Data Blocks... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226Procedure: To Copy a Chart to an External Application... . . . . . . . . . . . .227Procedure: To Copy a Table to an External Application ... . . . . . . . . . . . .228


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Using Breaks and Calculations

Lesson OverviewIn this unit, you learn to organize data in a table by applying breaks andcalculations.

This lesson describes how you, as report designers who create complex reports foryourselves and others, can change the query definition as you finalize your report.Interactive Analysis offers extensive reporting features in a single interface toadapt your report as required.


• Apply breaks to structure long tables of data into smaller groups• Apply calculations, such as sums and counts

Business ExampleAs a report designer, breaks and calculations serve an important purpose instructuring the data in the reports you create and making the reports generallyeasier to read and interpret. This lesson presents how to use breaks andcalculations.

About BreaksBreaks allow you to structure the data in a table into groups and make the dataeasier to view and interpret. You apply breaks on the data and values that youselect.

When you apply a break, Interactive Analysis separates all the data for eachunique value of the selected variable. It inserts a blank row or column after eachvalue, which allows you to easily insert subtotals for the group of data.

For example, a long table can be tedious to read and understand. A table thatdisplays Year, Quarter, State and Sales revenue shows the values of year andquarter repeated on several rows. When you apply two breaks to a table, one onYear and one on Quarter, the data becomes much clearer and simpler to read.Each group in the table displays quarterly Sales revenue for all the states for aunique Quarter and a single Year. The Year and Quarter values appear once atbreak header level and, consequently, allow the report user to focus on the Stateand Sales revenue data.

In the extra row that appears in the table after each group, you can easily insertsum totals for revenue over the Year.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using Breaks and Calculations

Using breaks has two main advantages:

• You can more efficiently organize how your data is represented.• You can display subtotals.

When you insert a break on a dimension, the values for the dimension areautomatically sorted in ascending order.

When the values are numeric, the lowest value displays in the first row of thetable, the highest in the last row.

When the values are alphabetical characters, then the values are sorted inalphabetical order from top to bottom.

Adding BreaksIn the Interactive Analysis Desktop application, you can add breaks in thefollowing ways:

• In the Analysis toolbox, on the Display tab, by clicking Break.• With the right-click contextual menu, by right-clicking the row or column

where you want to add the break and selecting Break>Add Break.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Organize a Report with Breaks

1. Click a table cell in the column or row where you want to insert a break.

2. Click the Analysis toolbox.

3. Click the Display tab.

4. Click the Break button.

The break appears on the selected column or row.

You can insert multiple breaks by repeating the same process on anotherrow or column.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To delete breaks

1. Click a cell in the column or row from which you want to remove a break.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, on the Display tab, click the arrow beside the Breakbutton and select Remove Break from the drop-down menu.

The break is removed from the report.


About CalculationsInteractive Analysis provides standard calculation functions to help you makequick calculations on the data in your reports. These calculations are available inthe Analysis toolbox on the Functions tab.

When you right-click the column or row where you cant to insert the calculation,you can also access the functions by selecting Insert and then the calculationyou want to insert

You can calculate sums, averages and percentages. You can also calculate the totalcount, and the minimum and maximum values for a variable.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Organize a Report with Calculations

1. Click a table cell that contains data.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, on the Function tab, depending on the calculationyou want to insert, click the Sum button or the Count button or click the arrowbeside the More button and select the calculation from the drop-down menu.

The aggregated value displays in a new row at the bottom or a new columnat the end of the table.

When you insert a percentage calculation, the results of the percentage aredisplayed in an additional column or row of the table with a value for eachcell.

3. To insert other calculations, repeat steps 1 and 2.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete a Calculation

1. Right-click the table or cross table that contains the calculation.

• In the With Data viewing mode, this is the calculated value.• In the Structure Only viewing mode, this is the cell that contains the

aggregate formula.

2. From the contextual menu, click Delete.

The Remove dialog box displays.

3. Depending on the table type, select Remove Row or Remove Column.

4. Click OK.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Apply breaks to structure long tables of data into smaller groups• Apply calculations, such as sums and counts


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using Sorts and Hiding Data

Lesson: Using Sorts and Hiding Data

Lesson OverviewYou can apply sorts to the results displayed in tables, to organize the order inwhich results are displayed in a column or row.

You can apply sorts to any dimensions, measures or details displayed in a table.Sorting dimensions and details helps you organize results chronologically, whilesorting measures helps you see the highest or lowest results at a glance.


• Explain the different sort orders available in Interactive Analysis• Apply sorts to display data in the order of importance of the information• Create custom sorts• Hide data and show hidden data

Business ExampleSorts allow you to order and structure the data in your reports. You can also chooseto hide or show data in reports, depending on how valuable the data is to the reportusers. This lesson presents how to use the sort and hide/show data functions.

About Sort OrdersSorts in Interactive Analysis allow you to apply the following orders:

Sort order Description

Default This is sometimes referred to as the "natural" order.Depending on the type of data in the column or row, theresults are sorted as follows:

• ascending numeric order for numeric data• ascending chronological order for date


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Sort order Description

• ascending alphabetical order for alphanumeric data

Ascending When selected, results are arranged in ascending order:the smallest value at the top of the column moving to thehighest value at the bottom. For example: 100, 200, 300 orCalifornia, Colorado, Florida.

Descending When selected, results are arranged in descending order: thehighest value at the top of the column moving to the smallestvalue at the bottom. For example: 300, 200, 100 or Florida,Colorado, California.

Custom You define your own sort order.

Ascending and descending sorts are applied to columns orrows. An ascending or descending sort impacts only thetable on which you apply the sort and is independent of sorton other tables in the same report.

However, you apply Custom sorts to an object. As a result,all tables in the document that use the object inherit thecustom sort. In fact, applying a custom sort sorts the data inthe data provider, not just in the table.

You can also add a temporary value, a value that does notexist in the database, to your document and include the valuein your custom sort.

For example, you can add a 13th month for adjustmentpurposes to your document even when the value does notexist in the database.

Alternatively, you can anticipate the addition of new storeto the database. Before the new store name exists in thedatabase, you can add the value as a temporary value and takethe new value into account for the design of your documents.

The order of the non-measure objects in a table initially controls the way thedata is sorted or grouped in the report.

The Sort feature allows you to format data in ascending or descending order.For example, in a table that shows State, Year and Sales revenue. You can applyan ascending sort on Year and a descending sort on Sales revenue. The tabledisplays the Years in chronological order and, within each Year, the Sales revenuedisplays in descending order.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


A default sort uses one of the predefined sort orders described in the table above --ascending or descending. For example, to sort your sales revenue data so that thestate with the highest sales revenue for each year appears first in the group, youcan apply the default sort order descending on the sales revenue.

Custom sorts allow you to define your own order for the data displayed in a report.For example, to display the eFashion month names in chronological order, youcan apply a custom sort.

How does Interactive Analysis Sort Data Whenyou Apply a Break?When you insert a break on a dimension, Interactive Analysis automaticallysorts the values for the dimension in ascending order. For numeric values, thelowest value appears in the first row of the table, the highest in the last row. Foralphabetical characters, the values appear in alphabetical order from top to bottom.You can change this sort order at any time.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Default Sort

1. In the report, click a cell in the row or column on which you want to apply asort.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, click the Display tab.

3. Click the arrow beside the Sort button and select the default sort order fromthe drop-down list.

Note: Directly clicking the Sort button applies an ascending sortorder.

4. Select the appropriate sort order.

The row or column is sorted in the order you specified.

Deleting a Default SortTo delete a default sort, you can do one of the following:

• Click the arrow beside the Sort button and select None from the drop-downmenu.

• Right-click a detail row in the row or column on which you have applied thesort and, from the contextual menu, select Sort>None.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Custom Sort

1. In the report, click a cell in the table on which you want to apply a customsort.

You cannot apply a custom sort on a measure object.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, on the Display tab, click the arrow beside the Sortbutton and select Manage Sorts from the drop-down list.

The Manage Sorts dialog box displays.

3. Under Sort, click Add.

The Add Sort dialog box displays.

4. Click the object in the column or row to which you want to apply the customsort and click OK.

5. Under Custom Order, click Values.

The Custom Sort dialog box displays.

6. Optionally, in the Values to add to list area, type the name of a value thatdoes not yet exist in the database and click the> button to add the valueto the sorted values.

7. Select each value in the Customized ascending list and use the arrow buttonsto place the value in the correct order within the sort.

8. Click OK to create the custom sort and close the Custom Sort dialog box.

9. Click OK to close the Add Sort dialog box.

The table now displays with the data sorted in the order you defined.

Hiding DataSometimes tables or specific rows and columns display no values or display valuesthat provide no added value to the report user, but are valuable to you as the reportdesigner in your efforts to present the data accurately.

For example, when your organization stops selling a product, the table, rows orcolumns for the product appear empty. By default Interactive Analysis displaysthe empty table, rows or columns. You can choose to display or hide the table,rows or columns when they contain no data. You can also display or hide a tablebased on the results of a formula.

You can also show or hide a dimension. For example, the Month object in theeFashion database provides the number of the month, but the report users prefer toview the Month name. A report designer can display the Month value to use anascending sort on the number of the month, and, then, hide the month because itdistracts the report users.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


You can show or hide tables, rows, columns or dimensions in the Report Elementstoolbox, on the Cell Behaviors tab, using the arrow beside the Hide button.

To show or hide a table, row, or column, you can also use the right-click contextualmenu for the table and select Format Table.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Hide Dimensions in Tables

1. Select the row or column in which the data for the dimension displays.

2. In the Report Elements toolbox, click the Cell Behaviors tab.

3. Click the arrow beside the Hide button and select Hide Dimension fromthe drop-down menu.

The row or column no longer appears in the table.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Show Hidden Dimensions in Tables

1. Select the table containing a hidden dimension.

2. In the Report Elements toolbox, click the Cell Behaviors tab.

3. Click the arrow beside the Hide button and select Show Hidden Dimensionfrom the drop-down menu.

The row or column containing the dimension displays in the table.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Hide or Show a Table, Column or Row

1. Right-click the table and, from the contextual menu, select Format Table.

The Format Table dialog box displays.

2. Click the General tab in the Format Table dialog box.

3. In the General tab, select the options that correspond to data you want to hideor display in the vertical, horizontal or cross table as follows:

To Select

Hide the table Hide always

Hide the table when it is empty Hide when empty

Hide the table when a formula istrue Hide when following formula is true

Display rows with empty measurevalues (for vertical and crosstables)

Show rows with empty measure values

Display rows with emptydimension values (for a verticaltable)

Show rows with empty dimensionvalues

Display columns with emptymeasure values (for horizontaland cross tables)

Show columns with empty measurevaluesDisplay columns with empty

dimension values (for a horizontaltable)

Show columns with empty dimensionvalues

Display rows/columns withempty dimension values (forcross tables)

Show rows/columns with emptydimension values

4. Click OK.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Show Hidden Tables, Cells or SectionsUseFor tables, cells and sections that are hidden unconditionally, when they contain nodata or based on the result of a formula, you can also use the Document Structuresand Filters pane in the Left Panel to show the hidden report elements.

Procedure1. Click the Document Structure and Filters button in the Left Panel.

The document structure displays, when you extend the Blocks to see theobjects contained in the data block, the hidden objects display in italics.

2. Right-click the Block that contains the hidden dimension that you want toshow and select Hide>Show Hidden Dimensions.

The hidden dimension displays in the table again.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain the different sort orders available in Interactive Analysis• Apply sorts to display data in the order of importance of the information• Create custom sorts• Hide data and show hidden data


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Formatting Breaks and Cross Tables

Lesson OverviewAlthough Interactive Analysis allows you to produce reports in several differenttable formats (vertical, horizontal, cross table and form), these basic formats donot always satisfy all the requirements of your working environment.

This lesson explains several different formatting techniques using breaks todisplay the results of queries in table formats slightly different from the defaults.

These techniques are particularly valuable when you combine them withcalculations and sorts to present your data clearly and comprehensibly to reportusers.


• Manipulate break headers and footers to change the display of the data• Prioritize multiple breaks in a table• Format cross tab headers

Business ExampleYou need to understand how to format breaks and cross tables to present the datain your reports in the clearest way possible. This lesson presents how to use theformatting options for breaks and cross tables.

Controlling Break Headers and FootersFrequently report designers use breaks to structure table data into smaller groupsfor the purposes of creating subtotals. When you apply a break to a table, thebreak footer displays as an additional row at the bottom of the table and serves todisplay the subtotal data clearly.

However, each time you place a break on a table, you also create a header. Whenyou know how to control the display of headers and footers you can use them topresent your data clearly.

For example, you can create a report that shows Year, Quarter, Month Name andSales revenue and insert a break on both Year and Quarter, but only displayfooters for the break on Quarter. The Quarter footer can contain the sum for thequarterly sales revenue.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Formatting Breaks and Cross Tables

You can create a report with the same objects, insert a break on both Year andQuarter and display footers for both Year and Quarter and then display both theyearly and quarterly sales revenues in the appropriate footer.

The next table shows how the sums display in the break footers for quarter andyear.

When you first insert a break on data, the default display options apply to thedata, as shown in the previous table. You can view the default break settings inthe Manage Breaks dialog box.

Formatting Multiple Break Headers and FootersYou can edit the settings in the Manage Breaks dialog box to format the displayof breaks for the:

• Display properties or how the results display on the break.• Page layout properties or how the breaks display on the report page.

The following table describes how each option displays.

Property Description

Break header Displays a header for each part of thetable, cross table, or form when youinsert a break.

Break footer Adds a footer after the last row for atable or the last column for a crosstable when you insert a break. Whenyou apply a calculation to the data, theresult displays in the footer.

Apply sort Applies the default sort order to thevalues in the break

Duplicate values: Display all Displays all values in the break, evenwhen they are duplicates.

Duplicate values: Display first Displays the first value only, whenvalues are duplicates.

Duplicate values: Merge Merges cells containing duplicatevalues and displays a single value overthe merged cells.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Property Description

Duplicate values: Repeat first on newpage

Displays the first value in a group ofduplicate values at the beginning of thebreak and on each new page.

Start on a new page Displays each part of the table or formcreated by a break on a new page.

Avoid page breaks in blocks Where possible, keeps each breaksection on the same page. This optiondoes not apply to blocks larger thanone page.

Repeat header on every page Repeats the header at the top of thetable on every new page when a tabledisplays on more than one page.

Repeat footer on every page Repeats the footer at the bottom of thetable on every new page when a tabledisplays on more than one page.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To View and Modify Default Break Settings

1. Click a table on which you have defined a break.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, click the Display tab.

3. Click the arrow next to the Break button and select Manage Breaks fromthe drop-down menu.

The Manage Breaks dialog box displays. You select the breaks available inthe Block on the right and the corresponding properties appear on the right.

4. On the left, select the break you want to modify.

5. On the right, select or deselect the properties according to how you wantthe breaks to display.

6. Click OK.

About Formatting BreaksYou can edit the settings in the Manage Breaks dialog box to format the displayof breaks.

Respect the following guidelines when using breaks:

• Place all needed breaks onto the table before placing any calculations. Whenyou place the calculations first and apply a break on an object, InteractiveAnalysis does not recognize the need for recalculation at the new breaklevel (that is, to create subtotals). Place the breaks first to ensure that thecalculations are correct.

• If you place an automatic calculation, for example a Sum or a Count, on atable after you format the breaks, you lose all formatting done on the breakfooters. The default action for these calculations is to calculate on all breaklevels present, regardless of how they have been formatted.

Prioritizing Multiple BreaksWhen you have multiple breaks in a document, you can change the default orderso that one break is displayed as a higher priority than the other.

You can also use the Manage Breaks dialog box to do this.

When you give the Year break priority, your table displays like this:

The data for all four Quarters of the first year in the three year period appears atthe top of the table, followed by the values for all Quarters in the next year. Thesum is calculated at the year level.

When you change the priority from the Year break to the Quarter break, yourtable appears like this:


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


The data for all first quarters during the three year period appears at the top of thetable, followed by all Q2 values. The sum is calculated at the quarter level, and atotal of all first quarter revenue is displayed as well.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Set the Priority of Multiple Breaks in a Table

1. In the Manage Breaks dialog box, on the left, select the break to which youwant to assign highest priority.

2. Use the Up arrow button to the right to move the break to the first position inthe display.

3. Select the other breaks to which you want to assign a priority and click theUp/Down buttons to promote/demote the break's priority in the display.

4. Click OK.

The display of the breaks changes to reflect their changed priority.

Formatting Cross Table HeadersSince cross tables contain two levels of dimension objects (object values arelocated both in the columns and in the rows of the block), several uniqueformatting issues may occur.

When two or more measure objects are used in a cross table, an additional headeris needed to display both object names.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Format Additional Header Rows

1. Select the cross table.

2. Right-click and, from the contextual menu, select Format Table.

The Format Table dialog box displays.

3. Click the General tab.

4. Select the Show object name option.

5. Click OK.

The measure object names appear as column headers in the cross table.

6. Optionally, to remove the two headings that appear in the top-left corner ofthe cross table, press the Ctrl key and click the extra headings. Proceedto step 7.

7. Click the Format toolbox>the Cell tab>Clear.

The two headings in the top-left corner of the cross table no longer display.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Center the Objects in the Column Header in a CrossTable

1. Click the column header cell.

2. Click the Center button on the Formatting toolbar to center the text orobjects.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 5: Formatting Breaks and CrossTables

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Apply calculations and breaks in a report• Format the breaks

Business ExampleYour report users need a report that includes calculation of sums and averages. Todisplay the calculation results clearly, you create a report that uses breaks and youformat the breaks to optimize the presentation of the data.

Task:Create a query to show data for the Outerwear and Overcoats lines only. Applycalculations to display the sum of the Sold at (unit price) for each line and for eachcategory within the lines. Finally format the breaks to display the data in theclearest way possible.

1. Create a query using eFashion showing Lines, Category, SKU desc, Sold at(unit price), and Discount.

2. Build a query filter to display values only for the Lines: Outerwear andOvercoats.


4. Apply a break on the Lines and Category columns.

5. Apply a Sum on the Sold at (unit price) column and an Average on theDiscount column.

6. On the break for the Lines column, set the options so the break header shows,but the break footer does not show.:

7. On the break for the Category column, set the options so the break headerand break footer do not show.

8. Save the report as Activity Breaks and Cross Tabs and closethe document.

9. Close the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 5: Formatting Breaks and CrossTablesTask:Create a query to show data for the Outerwear and Overcoats lines only. Applycalculations to display the sum of the Sold at (unit price) for each line and for eachcategory within the lines. Finally format the breaks to display the data in theclearest way possible.

1. Create a query using eFashion showing Lines, Category, SKU desc, Sold at(unit price), and Discount.

a) From the initial Interactive Analysis Desktop screen, under Universe,click eFashion.

b) Extend the Product class to display the objects that it contains.

c) Double-click the objects Line, Category and SKU desc and the measureSold at (unit price) so they appear in the Result Objects panel. You canalso drag the objects to the Result Objects panel.


e) Double-click Discount so it appears in the Result Objects panel. Youcan also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

2. Build a query filter to display values only for the Lines: Outerwear andOvercoats.

a) From the Universe outline, drag the Line object to the Query Filterspanel. You can also drag the object from the Result Objects panel.

b) Click the button to the right of the operands field and, in the drop-downmenu, click Value(s) from List.

c) In the List of Values dialog box, in the Lines area, double clickOuterwear and Overcoats so they appear in the Selected Value(s) area.

d) Click OK.


a) Click Run query.

4. Apply a break on the Lines and Category columns.

a) Right-click the Lines column and, from the contextual menu, selectBreak>Add Break.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


5. Apply a Sum on the Sold at (unit price) column and an Average on theDiscount column.

a) Click a cell in the Sold at column to select the column.

b) Click the Analysis tool box.

c) Click the Functions tab.

d) Click Sum.

e) Click a cell in the Discount column to select the column.

f) On the Functions tab, click the arrow to the right of the More buttonand, from the drop-down menu, click Average

6. On the break for the Lines column, set the options so the break header shows,but the break footer does not show.:

a) Right-click a cell in the Lines column and, from the contextual menu,select Breaks>Manage Breaks.

b) In the Manage Breaks dialog box, under Display properties, selectBreak header and deselect Break footer.

7. On the break for the Category column, set the options so the break headerand break footer do not show.

a) In the Manage Breaks dialog box, in the area where the breaks display,click Category.

b) Under Display properties, deselect Break header and Break footer.

c) Click OK.

8. Save the report as Activity Breaks and Cross Tabs and closethe document.



c) Click Save.


9. Close the document.

a)


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Manipulate break headers and footers to change the display of the data• Prioritize multiple breaks in a table• Format cross tab headers


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Filtering Report Data

Lesson: Filtering Report Data

Lesson OverviewInteractive Analysis provides allows you to restrict the data that displays in areport with report filters and input controls.

In this lesson, you learn how to apply report filters and using input controls.


• Explain the differences between using query filters and using report filters• Explain the operators available for report filters• Create the different report filter types• Explain the difference between report filters and input controls

Business ExampleReport filters and input controls allow you to create reports that show the reportusers the specific data that interests them and excludes extraneous information.

Ways to Filter Report DataInteractive Analysis provides different methods for restricting the data displayedin a document:

• Query filters allow you to limit the amount of data that is retrieved fromthe data source and returned by the query to your Interactive Analysisdocuments. You can only apply query filters when you are creating or editingthe query in the Query Panel.

• Report filters, on the other hand, allow you to restrict the data shown in thereport simply by hiding the data that does not interest you. The data is stillcontained in the document; it is just hidden from the report display.

The report users who view the report in Reading mode cannot see whatfilters are applied to the report.

• Input controls, like report filters, restrict the data shown in the report byhiding the data that does not interest you. The data is still contained in thedocument, but does not display in the report.

In addition, input controls empower report users who view the report inReading mode both to see the input controls applied to the report and toselect the filtered values to adapt the report display to their needs.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Tables or other blocks in your reports can sometimes be very large, and not veryeasy to read at a glance. To make the report easier to read, you can apply areport filter or an input control on a specific object, so that it displays only theinformation that interests you.

You apply report filters and input controls when you are editing a document in theInteractive Analysis Desktop window.

You can define filters and input controls on dimensions, measures, details andvariables listed on the Available Objects pane of the document.

The following types of report filters exist in Interactive Analysis. You use adifferent method to create each report filter type.

• Simple report filters offer and easy way to create filters simple filter forone value. They use the Equal to operator only and they filter all the datablocks in the report.

The filter is a global filter so it applies to the whole report and affects allthe data blocks it contains.

• Standard report filters offer the most flexibility in the definition of your filter.You can use them to create simple or create complex filters because all filteroperators are available and you can filter on single values or lists of values.

Standard report filters also offer the most flexibility in selecting the datato which you apply the filter. A standard report filter can be a global filterand apply to the whole report or it can be a block filter and apply to onlyone data block in the report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Simple Report Filter

1. In the report, click the Analysis toolbox.

2. Click the Interact tab.

3. Click Filter Bar.

The Filter Bar displays above the document.

4. Drag the object on which you want to filter to the toolbar. You can addmultiple objects to the toolbar to create multiple filters.

5. Select the value on which you want to filter from the drop down list of values.

Interactive Analysis filters the report on the value of the object you selected.For example, when you select "California" from the list of values for theState object, Interactive Analysis filters the report to exclude all rows whereState does not have the value "California".



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete a Simple Report Filter

1. To remove a simple report filter, click to select the object icon to the left ofthe filter value and drag the object to the Available Objects pane.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Standard Filter

1. Select the report element that you want to filter in the report or in theDocument Structure and Filters pane.


3. Click the Filters tab.

4. Click the Filter button.

The Report Filter dialog box displays. In the Filter Map pane, the reportelement to which you want to apply the filter displays.

5. Click the Add Filter button.

6. Double-click the object you want to filter.

The object selected displays in the filter definition area.

7. Beside the operator field, click the arrow and select an operator from thedrop-down list.

8. To enter the operand, you can type it in the Type the value field and pressthe Enter key or double-click the values that display below the field to movethem to the Selected value(s) area.

9. Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete a Standard Report Filter

1. Click the report element that has the filter applied to it.



4. Click the arrow beside the Filter button and select Remove Filter from thedropdown menu.

The filter is removed from the report element.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Filter with Input Controls

1. In the report where you want to apply input controls, click the Analysistoolbox.


3. Click the arrow beside Controls and select Define Control from the dropdownmenu.

The Define Input Control wizard displays to guide you in creating the inputcontrol.

4. Click the object for which you want to control the values that display in thereport and click Next.

The Choose Control Type step displays.

5. Select the control type you want to use and, when required, define theproperties for the control type.

6. Click Next.

The Assign Report Elements step displays.

7. Select the report element(s) to which you want to apply the input controland click Finish.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete Input Controls

1. In the report with input controls, display the Input Controls pane in the LeftPane.

2. Hover your mouse over the input control you want to delete so the buttonsfor the input control display and click the Remove button.

The input control no longer appears in the Input Controls pane and no longerfilters the data in the report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain the differences between using query filters and using report filters• Explain the operators available for report filters• Create the different report filter types• Explain the difference between report filters and input controls


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Ranking Data

Lesson OverviewYou may only want to show the extreme ranges of the data retrieved in yourreport. Ranking allows you to determine the top or bottom three or more valuesfor a given measure on a given dimension. Ranking combines aspects of the filterand sort functions so you can project, for example, only the top five values indescending order.


• Apply a ranking to show top values

Business ExampleReport users may want to see the data for only the top or bottom values for a givenmeasure. You can use ranking to show only these values in a report and hidethe extraneous values.

Applying RankingYou can apply ranking at the:

• Database level: In the Query panel, on the Query Filters panel toolbar, clickAdd a database ranking (this feature is database-specific.)

• Report level: In the report, select the data block to which you want to applyranking and in the Analysis toolbox, on the Filters tab, click Ranking.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Ranking Data

To Apply Ranking to a Report

1. In the report, select the row, column or data block to which you want toapply the ranking.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, click the Filters tab.

3. Click Ranking.

The Ranking dialog box displays.

4. Select the value for the range of values you want to display as follows:

• Top displays and ranks the highest values in the block.• Bottom displays and ranks the lowest values in the block.

5. Select the number of values you want to display in the field next to the Topor Bottom option.

6. Select the measure on which the ranking is based in the Based on list.

7. Click Ranked By and select the dimension on which the ranking is basedwhen you want to rank by a particular dimension and not by all dimensionsin the block.

8. Select the rank calculation mode in the Calculation mode list.

The available calculation modes include:

• Count: Counts the records and displays the first/last n records in thecount, according to the Ranking Selection.

• Percentage: Counts the records and returns the ones corresponding tothe top/bottom percent of the total records specified in the RankingSelection. It is not a real percentage, for example, if you want 10% andthere are a total of 100 rows, you would receive 10 rows.

• Cumulative Sum: Adds up the values and displays the top/bottom nrecords required to reach the sum specified in the Ranking Selection.

• Cumulative Percentage: Counts the total value of all the records anddisplays the top/bottom n records required to arrive at the percent of thetotal specified in the Ranking Selection.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Remove Ranking from a Report

1. In the report, select the data block to which the ranking applies.

2. In the Analysis toolbox, click the Filters tab.

3. Click the arrow beside Ranking and, from the dropdown list, select RemoveRanking.

The data block shows all the data retrieved.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 6: Enhancing the Presentationof a Report

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Apply breaks• Format the breaks• Apply a sum and percentage• Duplicate a table• Apply report filters to different data blocks in a report

Business ExampleReport consumers want to view and compare the data for two different states inthe same report. You use report filters to restrict the data displayed to the states inquestion. Instructions.

Task:Create a new document and use the analysis functions of breaks, calculations andinput controls to attract the report consumers' attention to the key data.

1. Create a new document showing Quantity sold by State, Year and Quarter.

2. Apply a break on State and Year.

3. Format the breaks so that only the break header and footer for Year show.

4. Add a sum and percentage to the Quantity sold column.

5. Define an Input Control on State to filter the first data block.

6. Create a duplicate of the table to the right of the existing table and create aninput control identical to the one for the first data block.

7. Save the document as Activity Presentation and close thedocument.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 6: Enhancing the Presentationof a ReportTask:Create a new document and use the analysis functions of breaks, calculations andinput controls to attract the report consumers' attention to the key data.

1. Create a new document showing Quantity sold by State, Year and Quarter.



c) Double-click State so it appears in the Result Objects panel. You canalso drag the object to the Result Objects panel.

d) Under the Time period class double-click Year and Quarter so theyappear in the Result Objects panel. You can also drag the objects tothe Result Objects panel.



g) Click Run query.

2. Apply a break on State and Year.

a) Select the State column.


c) Click Display>Break.

3. Format the breaks so that only the break header and footer for Year show.

a) Right-click the table and, from the contextual menu, select ManageBreaks.

b) Select the State break and deselect the Break Header and Break Footeroptions.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


4. Add a sum and percentage to the Quantity sold column.

a) Click a cell in the Quantity sold column to select the column.


c) Click the Functions tab.

d) Click Sum.

e) Click the arrow to the right of More.

f) In the dropdown menu, click Percentage.

5. Define an Input Control on State to filter the first data block.

a) Select the table.

b) Click the Analysis toolbox.

c) Click the Filters tab.

d) Click Controls.

e) In the Define Input Control dialog box, double-click State.

f) Select Check Boxes as the Control Type.

g) Click Next.

h) Assign the input control to the block.

i) Click Finish.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


6. Create a duplicate of the table to the right of the existing table and create aninput control identical to the one for the first data block.

a) Right-click the table so an outline appears around it and, from thecontextual menu, select Copy.

b) Right-click the area to the right of the existing table and, from thecontextual menu, select Paste.

c) Select the table.

d) Click the Analysis toolbox.

e) Click the Filters tab.

f) Click Controls.

g) In the Define Input Control dialog box, double-click State.

h) Select Check Boxes as the Control Type.

i) Click Next.

j) Assign the input control to the block.

k) Click Finish.

7. Save the document as Activity Presentation and close thedocument.



c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Apply a ranking to show top values


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Tracking Data Changes

Lesson OverviewYou may have reports that you refresh regularly to monitor performance or asituation. In this case, you want to identify important changes quickly so you cananalyze their cause and take appropriate action.

Interactive Analysis allows you to do this with data tracking.


• Understand how data tracking helps you monitor data• Activate data tracking• Set the reference data set• Format the data changes

Business ExampleWhen report users want the reports to immediately identify data that has changedsince a previous refresh, you can use data tracking to satisfy their requirements.

Tracking Data ChangesTo make informed and effective business decisions, you need to understand howthe data that you use to monitor a situation or company performance changesover time. This understanding allows you to take appropriate and timely actionto maintain and improve positive situations or to prevent and remedy negativesituations.

Interactive Analysis allows you to track and highlight data changes so you canidentify significant changes quickly, disregard irrelevant data, and focus youranalysis on the root cause of the changes.

For example, a report can allow you to monitor inventory levels and sales. Whenan item sells well, you can monitor inventory levels to ensure you replace the itemsas quickly as they sell. As a result, you can satisfy the high customer demand andsell high volumes of the successful item.

Without data tracking, you make ineffective use of your time because you mustfirst identify how the data has changed between two refreshes before you canbegin to analyze and address the reasons for the change.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Tracking Data Changes

Types of Data ChangeInteractive Analysis allows you to track the following types of data change:

• Added data• Removed data• Modified data• Increased data values• Decreased data values

You configure the display of these changes through the Interactive Analysisinterface.

Activating Data TrackingYou activate data tracking in the Analysis toolbox, on the Data Tracking tab viathe Track button on the toolbar. When you click Track, the Data Tracking dialogbox displays and allows you to select a particular data set as a reference point forfuture changes. This data is known as the reference data.

• Compare with last data refresh: Uses the current data as the reference datafor the next data refresh. The reference data updates automatically at eachrefresh.

• Compare with data refresh from: Uses and maintains the data refreshed onthe date provided as fixed reference data for all data refreshes.

When you activate data tracking, on the Data Tracking tab:

• The Show Changes button becomes available to you and allows you todisplay or hide the highlighted data changes.

• The Status bar indicates track changes is activated and the type of referencedata you have defined.

Formatting Data ChangesWhen you activate the data changes, you can accept the default options for theappearance (font style, size and color) of the data changes or you can define otheroptions in the Data Tracking dialog box on the Options tab.

You can separately configure the appearance of the following changes:

• Inserted, deleted and changed dimension and detail values.• Increased or decreased measure values.

Your SAP BusinessObjects administrator defines the default appearance ofchanged data in the Central Management Server. When you configure theappearance of changed data in Interactive Analysis, you override the CMS defaults.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Activate Data Tracking


2. Click the Data Tracking tab.

3. Click Track.

4. In the Data Tracking dialog box, select the reference data option that youwant to use. For fixed reference data, also enter the date for the referencedata.

5. Optionally, select Refresh data now to refresh the data when the dialogbox closes.

6. Optionally, click the Options tab to define the formatting for the way changeddata displays.

7. Click OK.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 7: Tracking Data Changes

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Activate data tracking• Define formatting to highlight data changes

Business ExampleYour report consumers want a report to monitor sales performance and quicklyidentify changes in the data at each refresh. You create a report that tracks andhighlights changes to the data.

Task:Create a new document, activate the tracking of data changes, define the referencedata and the formatting that highlights insertions.

1. Create a query using eFashion showing Year, Quarter, and Sales revenue.

2. Create a query filter to display values only for Q1 and Q2 and run the query.

3. Activate data tracking and choose to update the reference data with eachrefresh.

4. Define formatting to highlight insertions.

5. Return to the Query panel and modify the query so Q3 and Q4 also appearin the document at the next refresh.

6. Run the query.

7. Save the report as Activity Tracking Data Changes and closethe document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 7: Tracking Data ChangesTask:Create a new document, activate the tracking of data changes, define the referencedata and the formatting that highlights insertions.

1. Create a query using eFashion showing Year, Quarter, and Sales revenue.


b) Under the Time period class double-click Year and Quarter so theyappear in the Result Objects panel. You can also drag the objects tothe Result Objects panel.

c) Extend the Measures class to display the measures that it contains.

d) Double-click Quantity sold so it appears in the Result Objects panel.You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

2. Create a query filter to display values only for Q1 and Q2 and run the query.

a) From the Universe outline, drag the Quarter object to the Query Filterspanel. You can also drag the object from the or from the Result Objectspanel.

b) In the query filter, click the arrow to the right of the operator fieldand select In list.

c) Click the button to the right of the operands field.

d) In the dropdown menu, click Value(s) from list.

e) In the List of Values dialog box, in the Quarter area, double-click Q1and Q2 so they appear in the Selected Value(s) field.

f) Click OK.

g) Click Run query.

3. Activate data tracking and choose to update the reference data with eachrefresh.

a) Click the Analysis toolbox.

b) Click the Data Tracking tab.

c) Click Track.

d) In the Data Tracking dialog box, select Compare with last data refresh.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


4. Define formatting to highlight insertions.

a) In the Data Tracking dialog box, click Options.

b) Select Insertions.

c) Click Format to the right of the Insertions check box.

d) Define the formatting options to highlight insertions.

e) Click OK.

5. Return to the Query panel and modify the query so Q3 and Q4 also appearin the document at the next refresh.



c) In the Query Filters panel, click the single blue X button to removethe filter.

6. Run the query.

a) Click Run query.

Your report highlights the data for Q3 and Q4. The formatting for theQ3 and Q4 rows corresponds to the formatting you defined for theinsertions.

7. Save the report as Activity Tracking Data Changes and closethe document.



c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Understand how data tracking helps you monitor data• Activate data tracking• Set the reference data set• Format the data changes


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Highlighting Information with Formatting Rules

Lesson: Highlighting Information with Formatting Rules

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you learn how to highlight data that meets specific requirements bycreating and applying conditional formatting, sometimes know as alerters.


• Explain how to use conditional formatting to highlight important information• Build a formatting rule• Define the format displayed by the formatting rule• Apply conditional formatting• Build complex formatting rules

Business ExampleUsing conditional formatting rules allows you to create reports that call particularattention to data that fulfills certain criteria so that it does not escape the attentionof report consumers.

About Conditional Formatting RulesConditional formatting rules enable you to highlight results that meet or failspecific business targets. You can create a simple rule to highlight particularlyhigh or low results with a specific color or advanced conditional formatting rulesthat display a text comment, such as "High Performer".

For example, you can create an rule to highlight margin results that exceed$1,100,000. The margin results greater than $1,100,000 are highlighted everytime the report data is refreshed.

A formatting rule contains five elements:

• A name• An object or cell contents• An operator• Operand value(s) or another object• The conditional formatting

The object or cell contents, the operator and the operand make up the conditionthat determines whether the formatting will be applied to each cell where therule is applied. When you apply the new rule or alerter to a table column, row


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


or cell on a report, Interactive Analysis applies the condition to the cell valuesand displays any values that meet the condition in the rule with the formattingspecified. Additional principles to remember when creating rules or alerters are:

• You can apply them to tables, forms, section cells, and free-standing cells.• You cannot apply them to charts.• You can include up to 30 formatting rules in a document. You can apply them

to a maximum of 20 table columns or rows, free-standing cells or sectioncells on the reports. A maximum of 10 formatting rules can be applied to asingle-table column or row, free-standing cell or section cell.

Interactive Analysis applies a default format to display the formatting rule oralerter. You can make changes to this default format. You can insert multipleconditions within a rule. You can also create an advanced formatting rule byinserting a formula.

Creating and Activating a Conditional Formatting RuleYou create a formatting rule in the Formatting Rule Editor dialog box. When youcreate the conditions for the rule, you specify the appropriate filtered object or cell,the operator and the operand for the rule.

Then, you define the formatting in which the data should display when it satisfiesthe conditions for the rule. For example, you can define the formatting for thenumbers, font style, background style and borders.

Then, you define the formatting in which the data should display when it satisfiesthe conditions for the rule. Finally, you apply the rule. You can apply the rules tothe following report elements:

• Columns in vertical tables• Rows in horizontal tables• Cells in forms and cross tables• Section headers• Free-standing cells


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Single Condition Formatting Rule


2. Click the Conditional tab.

3. Click New Rule.

The Formatting Rule Editor dialog box displays.

4. In the Name field, type a name for the formatting rule.

5. In the Description field, type the description for the formatting rule.

6. In the Filtered object or cell field, specify whether you want the rule to act onan object or cell contents according to the description of the options in thefollowing table:

Specify To create a rule that acts on:

Cell contents The contents of the cell to which you apply the rule.

Filtered object The value of an object.

To define a filtered object, click the button beside thefield and select the object from the Available objectsdialog box.

Note: You cannot define a rule on a cell containing numeric typedata, for example, a date or calculation, because Interactive Analysishandles the value you type in the Value text box as a character string.

7. Select the operator from the Operator list.

8. Use one of the following techniques to enter the value that triggers theformatting rule in the Value box:

• Type the value.• Click the button to the right of the Value field, click Select Value and

select the value from the List of Values dialog box.• Click the button to the right of the Value field, from the menu, select

Object or Variable and select the object or variable from the Objectsand Variables dialog box.

You have created the rule. Interactive Analysis applies default formattingoptions for the formatting rule.

9. Optionally, click Format and modify the format properties in the FormattingRule Editor dialog box.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


10. Click OK.

The Formatting Rule Editor dialog box closes. The new formatting ruledisplays in the Formatting Rule dropdown list.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Apply Conditional Formatting Rules

1. Select the report element to which you want to apply the rule.


3. Click the Conditional tab.

4. Click the arrow beside Formatting Rules and, from the dropdown list, selectthe rule to apply.

In the report, the data that meets the conditions for the rule displays withthe formatting defined for the rule.

Creating Multiple Condition Formatting RulesYou can apply multiple conditions in a single formatting rule. You can only linkthe conditions with AND.

For example, you can highlight Sales revenue when results reach over $300K andwhen those results occur in stores in any US State except California. To do this,you create a formatting rule with the following two conditions:

• [Sales revenue] = Greater "30000"

AND

• [State] = Not equal "California"

The data that meets both conditions trigger the formatting that you define. Todisplay the data that meets different conditions with different formatting, you needto create multiple Else conditions, by clicking the Add button at the top of thecondition area and define the new condition using different formatting settings.

Note: You can create a maximum of 30 formatting rules in a document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Multiple Condition Formatting RulePrerequisitesAfter you create a first condition in the Formatting Rule Editor, follow thesesteps to create additional conditions.

Procedure1. In the Formatting Rule Editor, click + to the far right of the Operands field,

below the first condition defined.

The fields for a new condition display below the existing row. The operatorAND links the conditions.

2. Complete the fields for the new condition.

The formatting for a new condition added in this way will be identical to thatof the first condition in the formatting rule.

3. Click OK.

The new rule appears in the Formatting Rules dropdown list.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 8: Creating a ComplexFormatting Rule

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Create a conditional formatting rule with multiple conditions• Activate the conditional formatting rule

Business ExampleIn this exercise, you create a report that color codes the quantity sold figures intothree different ranges so that report consumers can quickly identify and assimilatethe volume sold according to state.

Task:In this exercise, you implement a formatting rule on the Quantity sold column tohighlight values in the Quantity sold column with three different colors to reflectthe volume sold. Define a formatting rule that displays different colors for theranges defined below:

Range

Under 15,000 items

Between 15,000 and 45,000 items

More than 45,000 items

1. Open the Alerters document.

2. Change to Design mode to create a formatting rule.

3. Create a conditional formatting rule and name it Quantity Range.

4. Create a condition using the following details:

Filtered object or cell Operator Operand

Quantity sold Less 15000

5. Add an Else condition that associates two criteria. Define the first criterion,according to the following details:


Quantity sold Greater or equal 15000



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


6. Define the second criterion, according to the following details:


Quantity sold Less or equal 145000

7. Add an Else condition according to the following details:


Quantity sold Greater 45000

8. Accept the default formatting for the conditions and close the FormattingRule Editor dialog box.

9. Apply the conditional formatting rule to the Quantity sold column.

10. Save the report and close the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 8: Creating a Complex FormattingRuleTask:In this exercise, you implement a formatting rule on the Quantity sold column tohighlight values in the Quantity sold column with three different colors to reflectthe volume sold. Define a formatting rule that displays different colors for theranges defined below:

Range

Under 15,000 items

Between 15,000 and 45,000 items

More than 45,000 items

1. Open the Alerters document.

a) From the initial Interactive Analysis Desktop screen, click the Openbutton.

b) In the Open a document dialog box, navigate to the Alerters document,according to the details provided by your instructor.

c) Double-click Alerters.wid.

2. Change to Design mode to create a formatting rule.

a) Click the arrow button on the right of the toolbar to display the differentapplication modes.

b) Click Design.

3. Create a conditional formatting rule and name it Quantity Range.

a) Click the Analysis toolbox.

b) Click the Conditional tab.

c) Click New Rule.

d) In the Formatting Rule Editor dialog box, in the Name field, typeQuantity Range.

4. Create a condition using the following details:



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



Quantity sold Less 15000

a) Click the button beside the Filtered object or cell field.

b) Double-click Quantity sold.

c) In the Operand field, type 15000.

5. Add an Else condition that associates two criteria. Define the first criterion,according to the following details:


Quantity sold Greater or equal 15000

a) Click Add.

b) Click the button beside the Filtered object or cell field.

c) Double-click Quantity sold.

d) In the Operator field, select Greater or equal.

e) In the Operand field, type 15000.

6. Define the second criterion, according to the following details:


Quantity sold Less or equal 145000

a) Click + (plus) to add a line for the second criterion in the condition.

b) Click the button beside the Filtered object or cell field.

c) Double-click Quantity sold.

d) In the Operator field, select Less or equal.

e) In the Operand field, type 45000.

7. Add an Else condition according to the following details:



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



Quantity sold Greater 45000

a) Click the button beside the Filtered object or cell field.

b) Double-click Quantity sold.

c) In the Operator field, select Greater.

d) In the Operand field, type 45000.

8. Accept the default formatting for the conditions and close the FormattingRule Editor dialog box.

a) Click OK.

9. Apply the conditional formatting rule to the Quantity sold column.

a) Select the Quantity sold column.

b) Click the dropdown arrow beside the Formatting Rules button.

c) Select Quantity Range.

10. Save the report and close the document.


b) In the upper right-hand corner of the Report Panel, click the Closebutton.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain how to use conditional formatting to highlight important information• Build a formatting rule• Define the format displayed by the formatting rule• Apply conditional formatting• Build complex formatting rules


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Organizing a Report into Sections

Lesson: Organizing a Report into Sections

Lesson OverviewYou can organize a report into sections which group data based on a value. Thegrouped value appears as a header outside the block.


• Break a report into sections• Insert a sum and position it using drag and drop• Insert a chart in each section

Business ExampleUse sections to group the data in a report logically and in a way that helps thereport consumers to quickly navigate among the sections to find the data theywant and to read the data easily.

About SectionsYou can group data in a block using the break function and using the sectionfunction.

A section displays the grouped value appears as a header outside the block insteadof remaining within the block. More importantly, break only groups within ablock, whereas sectioning groups the entire report. That means that when youhave multiple tables and charts in a single report, the sections group the data forall tables and charts according to the section value.

This has a number of advantages:

• You can have multiple blocks projected from the same microcube within asingle report, all sub-grouped to the sectioned level.

• You can insert subtotal cells, repeated in each section, which are created bythe simple process of drag and drop.

You can apply sorts to the results displayed in section cells, to organize the orderin which sections are displayed in report tables.

Sorting sections allows you to organize the section headers logically in a report.For example, when you create sections on a report for each year, you can apply adescending sort so that the sections are organized with the most recent year as thefirst section and the earliest year at the end of the report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Section

1. In the report, right-click a cell in the row or column on which you wantto create a section. For example, if you want to create a section on State,right-click one of the cells in the State row or column.

2. From the drop-down menu, select Set as Section.

The cell you selected defines which object is used to divide the table intosections. Each value of this object is displayed as a section header, and thetable below each section header displays the data concerning that value.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Display an Aggregate

1. In the report, click a cell in the row or column for the object on which youwould like to display an aggregate. For example, if you would like to displayan aggregate for Sales Revenue, click a cell in the Sales Revenue row orcolumn.

2. Click the Analysis Toolbox.

3. Click the Functions. Tab.

4. On the tab, click the buttons or use the More dropdown list to select theselect the appropriate aggregation for your report.

A new row or column displaying the aggregate is inserted in the table ineach section.

When you display an aggregate in a sectioned report, the overall total is notcalculated and displayed, like it is when you use a break and then applyan aggregation.

5. Optionally, to display the aggregate at the section heading level, right-click toselect the cell with the aggregate and, from the contextual menu, select Copy.

6. Position your cursor at the section header level, right-click and, from thecontextual menu, select Paste.

Note: When you make such a change in one section, all the sectionsshow the change.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Insert a Block in Each Section

1. In a sectioned report, click the Report Element toolbox.

2. Click the Table, Chart or Others tab, according to the type of data blockyou want to insert.

3. On the tab, click the button or select from the dropdown menu the type ofdata block you want to insert.

4. Click the area in the section where you want the chart to display.

Note: As you move your mouse into the section, an outline displaysto show the section boundaries.

The data block displays in the section and appears in the same position ineach section. You can now add to the block the data you want to display.

Navigating from Section to SectionThe Report Map panel in the main window of the Interactive Analysis Desktopdisplays all the reports and sections contained in a document. You can navigatefrom section to section by clicking on the section names in the Report Map.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Navigate from Section to Section

1. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, in the Left panel, clickReport Map.

The Report Map panel displays all the reports and sections contained inthe document.

2. Click the + beside the report name to expand the structure of the report youwould like to navigate.

3. Click the name of the section to which you want to navigate.

The displayed report scrolls down the selected section within the report.

You can use the Report Map pane to jump from one report to another, as wellas to navigate from section to section. This feature is useful when you have alarge document with multiple reports and many sections to navigate through.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete a SectionUseUse the View Structuremode to display the report structure when deleting a section.

Procedure1. In the sectioned report, right-click the section cell and, from the contextual

menu, click Delete.

2. Select Section and Cell to delete the section.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Break a report into sections• Insert a sum and position it using drag and drop• Insert a chart in each section


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Copying and Pasting Data Blocks

Lesson OverviewIn Interactive Analysis, you can easily copy data from a report into otherapplications such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Power Point. You can alsocopy the data in a report as text. This makes it easier to present and share youranalysis in different file formats.


• Copy a block of data into a target application• Copy an image of a data block into a target application

Business ExampleCopying data into other applications allows you and report consumers to displayand share the data for different presentation purposes, such as presenting the datain a slide or in a document that includes text.

Copying Data Blocks to Other ApplicationsWhen you copy and paste a chart into an external application, the chart displays asan image in the target document.

When you copy and paste a table into an external application, the technique forcopying and pasting that you use determines how the data displays and whetheryou can manipulate the data in the target application:

• To display the data in a table in the target application and you can manipulatethe data contained in the table, copy and paste the table.

• To transfer the table to the target application as an image and maintain theformatting from Interactive Analysis, but not be able to manipulate the data,drag the table to target application.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Copying and Pasting Data Blocks

To Copy a Chart to an External Application

1. Choose one of the following methods to copy a chart from InteractiveAnalysis to a target application:

Copy and Paste Methods

1. Right-click the chart, and, from the contextual menu, select Copy.2. In the target document, right-click the area where you want the table

to appear and, from the contextual menu, select Paste.

Drag and drop the table from Interactive Analysis to the target application.

2. Save the target document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Copy a Table to an External Application

1. Follow the instructions appropriate for how you want the data in a tableto display in the target application:

To Follow the steps below:

Display the data in atable and manipulate thedata within the table

1. Right-click the table and, from thecontextual menu, select Copy.

2. In the target application, right-click thearea where you want the table to appearand, from the contextual menu, selectPaste.

Display the data in thetable as an image thatmaintains the originalformatting

Drag and drop the table from InteractiveAnalysis to the target application.

2. Save the target document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Copying and Pasting Data Blocks

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Copy a block of data into a target application• Copy an image of a data block into a target application


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Apply breaks to structure long tables of data into smaller groups• Apply calculations, such as sums and counts• Explain the different sort orders available in Interactive Analysis• Apply sorts to display data in the order of importance of the information• Create custom sorts• Hide data and show hidden data• Manipulate break headers and footers to change the display of the data• Prioritize multiple breaks in a table• Format cross tab headers• Explain the differences between using query filters and using report filters• Explain the operators available for report filters• Create the different report filter types• Explain the difference between report filters and input controls• Apply a ranking to show top values• Understand how data tracking helps you monitor data• Activate data tracking• Set the reference data set• Format the data changes• Explain how to use conditional formatting to highlight important information• Build a formatting rule• Define the format displayed by the formatting rule• Apply conditional formatting• Build complex formatting rules• Break a report into sections• Insert a sum and position it using drag and drop• Insert a chart in each section• Copy a block of data into a target application• Copy an image of a data block into a target application


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What are two advantages to applying breaks to a report.

2. What is the difference between a report filter and a query filter?

3. What are the principal differences between standard report filters and inputcontrols in Reading mode?

4. What is the name of the feature that allows you to display only the top orbottom values of the data returned by a query?

5. What feature can you use to highlight results that meet or fail to meet specificbusiness targets?

6. You can apply a formatting rule to a table or a chart in an InteractiveAnalysis document.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


7. What are the differences between applying breaks and sections to a report?


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What are two advantages to applying breaks to a report.

Answer: You can use breaks to subgroup data within a block and to easilyapply and display subtotals.

2. What is the difference between a report filter and a query filter?

Answer: A query filter is created in the Query Panel to limit the dataretrieved from the database. A report filter is created in the InteractiveAnalysis main window to limit the data shown in the report simply by hidingthe data in which you are not interested.

3. What are the principal differences between standard report filters and inputcontrols in Reading mode?

Answer: In Reading mode, the input controls are visible and the report usercan use the input controls to define the values that display in the report.Standard filters are not visible and the report user cannot define the valuesthat display in the report.

4. What is the name of the feature that allows you to display only the top orbottom values of the data returned by a query?

Answer: Ranking.

5. What feature can you use to highlight results that meet or fail to meet specificbusiness targets?

Answer: Formatting rules or alerters.

6. You can apply a formatting rule to a table or a chart in an InteractiveAnalysis document.

Answer: False

You cannot apply a formatting rule to a chart.

7. What are the differences between applying breaks and sections to a report?

Answer: The difference is that the grouped value appears as a header outsidethe block instead of remaining within the block. A break only groups withina block, whereas sectioning groups the entire report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 6Formatting Reports

Unit OverviewThis lesson describes how to display information in tables and charts.


• Describe how to format each report element• Display the Format dialog box for each report element• Change the format of a report• Change the format of a table• Change the format of table header cells• Change the position of a table on the page• Change the format of cells• Change the section format• Prepare a document for PDF and printing• Define the format options for a bar chart• Define the format options for a pie chart

Unit ContentsLesson: Formatting Documents.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Procedure: To Format a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238Procedure: To Format a Table .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239Procedure: To Format a Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240Procedure: To Insert a Page Number in the Report Footer .. . . . . . . . . .241Procedure: To Format a Section... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242Exercise 9: Formatting and Printing Reports .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Lesson: Formatting Charts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252Procedure: To Apply a Chart Style .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253Procedure: To Define a Chart Format .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254Exercise 10: Formatting Charts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 6: Formatting Reports BOW310

Lesson: Formatting Documents

Lesson OverviewWhen you edit a report in Interactive Analysis, you can use the formatting optionsto define the display of all the elements in a document.

This lesson describes how to use the format options for specific report.


• Describe how to format each report element• Display the Format dialog box for each report element• Change the format of a report• Change the format of a table• Change the format of table header cells• Change the position of a table on the page• Change the format of cells• Change the section format• Prepare a document for PDF and printing

Business ExampleYou can use the multiple format options in Interactive Analysis to present the dataclearly in a document, ensure the data prints clearly and ensure that reports respectyour organization's standards for the way documents appear.

To Format a DocumentTo format your documents and the various report elements they contain, right-clickthe report element in the Report Panel or in the Document Structure and Filterspane and, from the contextual menu, select the corresponding Format item.

You can also find many, but not all formatting options on the tabs and toolbars forthe following toolboxes

Report Element Toolbox

Report and report header and footer Page Setup

Tables and cells Format

Sections Report Element


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Formatting Documents

Formatting a ReportYou can use the Format Report dialog box to define the appearance of the reportlayout, margins, color, headers and footers.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Format a Report

1. Right-click the Report tab for which you want to view or change the formatoptions and, from the contextual menu, select Format Report.

The Format Report dialog box displays.

2. Click the appropriate tab for the format options you want to define and makethe required changes:

• General: to define the report name, page layout, scaling, margins andcontent.

• Appearance: to define the report color, pattern and hyperlink color.• Header: to define the report header show option, size, background

image or color.• Footer: to define for the report footer show option, size, background

image or color.

3. Click OK.

The report displays according to the format options you defined.

Formatting a TableYou can use the Format Table dialog box to define the appearance of the hide/showoptions, borders, headers, footers and display on the page.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Format a Table

1. Right-click the table for which you want to view or change the formatoptions and, from the contextual menu, select Format Table.


• General: to define the table name, show rows or columns options,show measure and dimension value options, hide options, show tableheader and footer options.

• Border: to define the appearance of borders.• Appearance: to define the background image or color, spacing and

padding and alternate row colors.• Layout: to define horizontal and vertical start on new page, avoid page

break and repeat on every page options and to define relative positionof the table on the page.

3. Click OK.

The table displays according to the format options you defined.

Formatting a CellYou can use the Format Cell dialog box to define the appearance of the cell height,width and the legibility of the data the cell contains.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Format a Cell

1. Right-click the cell or cells for which you want to view or change the formatand, from the contextual menu, select Format Cell.


• General: to define the cell name, size, display or hide options.• Alignment: to define alignment of text within the cell, cell padding

and display options.• Font: to define the cell font.• Border: to define the appearance of borders.• Appearance: to define the background image or color.• Layout: to define horizontal and vertical start on new page, avoid page

break and repeat on every page options and to define relative positionof the cell on the page.

3. Click OK.

The cell or cells display according to the format options you defined.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Insert a Page Number in the Report Footer

1. In the report, click the Page Setup toolbox.

2. Click the Display tab.

3. Click the Page button to view the document in page layout mode.

4. Click the bottom of the page so the footer outline displays.

5. Click the Report Element toolbox.


7. Click the arrow beside the Pre-Defined button and, from the dropdownmenu, select Page Number.

8. Click the area in the footer where you want to position the page number.

The page numbers appear in the footer of your document.

Formatting a SectionYou can use the Format Section dialog box to hide the section and to define theappearance of the section background and layout on a page.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Format a Section

1. In the report, when required, click within the section to display the outlinesof the section.

2. Right-click within the section and, from the contextual menu, select FormatSection.


• General: to define the section name, height, and hide options.• Appearance: to define the background image or color.• Layout: to define vertical start on new page, avoid page break and

repeat on every page options.

4. Click OK.

The sections display according to the format options you defined.

Preparing Documents for PDF and PrintingWhen you prepare documents for a PDF file or printing, you can use the formatoptions at various levels of your document to ensure that the data displays on thepage in a way that is easy to view and interpret.

For example, you can use the format options associated with sections to ensureeach section starts on a new page. You can also use the format options associatedwith breaks to avoid page breaks in a block.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 9: Formatting and PrintingReports

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Apply formatting options to the report elements in a document to structure

the data and present it in a clear and readable manner.

Business ExampleYou create a report with formatting options that comply with your organization'sstandards for its documents and make the data easy to read and interpret forreport consumers.

Task:Create a new document and use the appropriate format options to display thedata clearly.

1. Create a new document showing State, Year, Quarter, and Sales revenue.

2. Insert sections on both Year and Quarter.

3. Insert a sum total for each Quarter and Year at the section header level.

4. Format the cells with the section-level sums so they have a blue border anddisplay in a font of the same blue.

5. Format the cells with the yearly sums to align vertically with the cellcontaining the year.

6. Format the cells with the quarterly sums to align vertically with the cellcontaining the quarter.

7. Insert a Column chart to show Sales revenue by State at the level of Quarter.

8. Save the document as Activity Formatting Reports.

9. Insert another report in the same document showing Sales revenue by Year,Quarter, and Month.

Note: You need to add Month to your data provider.

10. Insert a break on Year and Quarter.

11. Insert a sum on Sales revenue.

12. At the report level, change the margins to 100 px with a landscape pageorientation.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


13. At the table level, add spacing and padding around the table cells for easierreading.

14. At the cell level, format the Year value so it displays in bold text.

15. Insert another report in the same document showing Year, Quarter, Month,State, Store name, and Sales revenue. You need to add Store name to yourdata provider.

16. View the report as it appears on a printed or PDF page.

17. Format the table to avoid page breaks.

18. Insert a break on Year.

19. Right-click the State column and click Set as Section.

20. Format the section to start on a new page for each state.

21. Set the break on Year to display the break value on every new page.

22. Insert a break on Quarter and prevent page breaks in the table for Quarter.

23. Save the document as Activity Format Charts and close thedocument.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 9: Formatting and PrintingReportsTask:Create a new document and use the appropriate format options to display thedata clearly.

1. Create a new document showing State, Year, Quarter, and Sales revenue.




d) Under the Time period class, double-click Year and Quarter so theyappear in the Result Objects panel. You can also drag the objects tothe Result Objects panel.


f) Double-click Sales revenue so it appears in the Result Objects panel.You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

g) Click Run query.

2. Insert sections on both Year and Quarter.

a) Right-click the Year column and click Set as Section.

b) Right-click the Quarter column and click Set as Section.

3. Insert a sum total for each Quarter and Year at the section header level.

a) Right-click the Sales revenue column, and from the contextual menu,select Copy.

b) Right-click next to the value for Quarter at the beginning of the Quartersection and, from the contextual menu, select Paste.

c) Right-click next to the value for Year at the beginning of the Yearsection and, from the contextual menu, select Paste.

Note: Note: You may need to scroll to the right of the page tosee where sum for Year. You can drag the cell closer to theYear value.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


4. Format the cells with the section-level sums so they have a blue border anddisplay in a font of the same blue.

a) Click the cell with the quarter section sum, press the Ctrl key on yourkeyboard and click the cell with the year section sum.

b) Right-click and, from the contextual menu, select Format Cell.

c) On the right of the Format Cell dialog box, click Font.

d) Click the Font Color button to display the color palette.

e) Click the shade of blue you want to apply to the font.

f) Optionally, click Apply to apply the font color change immediately.

g) On the right of the Format Cell dialog box, click Border.

h) Click the Color button to display the color palette.

i) Click the shade of blue you want to apply to the border.

j) Click OK.

5. Format the cells with the yearly sums to align vertically with the cellcontaining the year.

a) Right-click one of the year section sum cells and, from the contextualmenu, select Format Cell.

b) In the area on the right of Format Cell dialog box, click Layout.

c) Under Relative Position: Vertical, in the from the field, select Top edge.

d) In the of field, select =[Year].

e) Click OK.

6. Format the cells with the quarterly sums to align vertically with the cellcontaining the quarter.

a) Right-click one of the quarter section sum cells and, from thecontextual menu, Format Cell.

b) In the area on the right of Format Cell dialog box, click Layout.

c) Under Relative Position: Vertical, in the from the field, select Top edge.

d) In the of field, select =[Quarter].

e) Click OK



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


7. Insert a Column chart to show Sales revenue by State at the level of Quarter.

a) Click the Report Element toolbox.

b) Click the Charts tab.

c) Click the Insert Column Chart button.

d) Click the area of the report where you want the chart to display.

e) Drag State to the chart.

f) Drag the Sales revenue measure to the chart.

8. Save the document as Activity Formatting Reports.



c) Click Save.

9. Insert another report in the same document showing Sales revenue by Year,Quarter, and Month.

Note: You need to add Month to your data provider.

a) Right-click the Report 1 tab.

b) Click Add Report.

c) Click the Data Access toolbox.

d) On the Data Providers tab, click Edit.

e) From the Universe outline, double-click Year. You can also drag theobject to the Result Objects Panel.

f) Click Run query.

10. Insert a break on Year and Quarter.

a) Right-click the Year column and, from the contextual menu, selectBreak>Add Break.

b) Right-click the Quarter column and, from the contextual menu, selectBreak>Add Break.

11. Insert a sum on Sales revenue.

a) Right-click the Sales Revenue column and, from the contextual menu,select Insert>Sum.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


12. At the report level, change the margins to 100 px with a landscape pageorientation.

a) Right-click the area under the header and, from the contextual menu,select Format Report.

b) In the Format Report dialog box, in the General options, under Pagelayout, in the Orientation field, select Landscape.

c) Click OK.

13. At the table level, add spacing and padding around the table cells for easierreading.

a) Right-click the table and, from the contextual menu, select FormatTable.

b) In the menu on the right of the Format Table dialog box, clickAppearance.

c) Under Spacing and Padding, in the Horizontal and Vertical fields setthe values to 0.2.

14. At the cell level, format the Year value so it displays in bold text.

a) Right-click the Year column and, from the contextual menu, selectFormat Cell.

b) In the menu on the right of the Format Cell dialog box, click Font.

c) Under Font Style, click Bold.

d) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


15. Insert another report in the same document showing Year, Quarter, Month,State, Store name, and Sales revenue. You need to add Store name to yourdata provider.

a) Right-click the Report 2 tab.

b) Click Add Report.

c) Click the Data Access toolbox.

d) On the Data Providers tab, click Edit.

e) From the Universe outline, extend the Store class.

f) Double-click Store name. You can also drag the object to the ResultObjects Panel.

g) Click Run query.

h) In the Available Objects Panel, click Year and, on your keyboard, pressthe Ctrl key.

i) Click Quarter, Month, State, Store name, and Sales revenue.

j) Drag the objects to the report.

16. View the report as it appears on a printed or PDF page.

a) Click the Page Setup toolbox.

b) Click the Display tab.

c) Click Page.

17. Format the table to avoid page breaks.

a) Right-click the table and, from the contextual menu, select FormatTable.

b) In the menu on the right of the Format Table dialog box, click Layout.

c) Under Horizontal, select Avoid page break.

d) Click OK.

18. Insert a break on Year.

a) Right-click the Year column and, from the contextual menu, selectBreak>Add Break.

19. Right-click the State column and click Set as Section.

a)



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


20. Format the section to start on a new page for each state.

a) Right-click a section cell and, from the contextual menu, select FormatCell.

b) In the menu on the right of the Format Cell dialog box, click Layout.

c) Under Horizontal, select Start on a new page.

d) Click OK.

21. Set the break on Year to display the break value on every new page.

a) Right-click the Year column and, from the contextual menu, selectBreak>Manage Breaks.

b) Select Repeat break value on every new page.

c) Click OK.

22. Insert a break on Quarter and prevent page breaks in the table for Quarter.

a) Right-click the Quarter column and select Break>Add Break.

b) Right-click the Quarter column and select Break>Manage Breaks.

c) Select Avoid page breaks in table.

d) Click OK.




c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe how to format each report element• Display the Format dialog box for each report element• Change the format of a report• Change the format of a table• Change the format of table header cells• Change the position of a table on the page• Change the format of cells• Change the section format• Prepare a document for PDF and printing


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Formatting Charts

Lesson OverviewLike reports, tables and cells, charts are composed of a number of elements thatcan be formatted separately


• Define the format options for a bar chart• Define the format options for a pie chart

Business ExampleUse chart format options to clearly display the data in reports.

Formatting ChartsBefore you format a chart, SAP recommends as a best practice that you first createa chart and feed it with all its dimensions.

You format a chart in two steps:

1. Apply a chart style: A chart style is a group of settings stored within a sourcefile. The chart style allows you to manipulate many aspects of the chart.

Chart styles group together a set of predefined settings including where chartitems are placed within the chart, color palettes, textures, shadows, fonts.

You can select the styles Flashy, Normal or High Contrast.

2. Change the default format options in the Format Chart dialog box.

The Format Chart dialog box provides two levels of tabs to allow you tomanage the many aspects of chart display.

Note: When you change the default format options and then apply thechart style, the settings in the chart style can result in the modificationof the format options you defined.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Formatting Charts

To Apply a Chart Style

1. Click the Report Element toolbox.

2. Select the chart to which you want to apply a chart style.

The Chart Style tab displays in the Report Element toolbox

3. Click the arrow beside the Chart Style button and select the Chart Stylefrom the dropdown menu.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Define a Chart Format

1. Right-click the chart and, from the contextual menu, select Format Chart.

You can also access the Format Chart dialog box in the Report Elementtoolbox on the Chart Style tab, by clicking the Format Chart button.

The Format Chart dialog box displays.

2. Click the tab and sub-tab corresponding to the format option you want todefine and make the required changes.

3. Click OK

The chart shows the format options that you defined.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 10: Formatting Charts

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Create a document that contains different chart types• Apply appropriate format options to ensure that the charts present data clearly

Business ExampleYou use charts to present data graphically so report consumers can understandand interpret the data quickly. You can enhance the report consumers ability toassimilate the data presented in documents when you apply appropriate formatoptions to charts.

Task:In this exercise, you display the data in charts and format the charts to present thedata in a way that is clear and easy for report consumers to read.

1. Create a new query with State, Year and Quantity sold.

2. Create a Query Filter to restrict the data retrieved for State to California,Colorado, and DC.

3. Display the results in a bar chart.

4. Enlarge the width and height of the chart so the data is easy to read.

5. Remove the axis names State and Quantity sold.

6. Insert a new report and create a Surface chart showing Quantity sold byState and Year.

7. Enlarge the width and height of the chart so it is easy to read.

8. Display the legend to the left of the chart.


10. Show the chart data values and display the values horizontally in a Bold,dark blue, 10 point font size.

11. Add a chart title of Surface Area Chart.

12. Insert a new report and create a Pie chart showing Quantity Sold by Year.

13. Enlarge the Width and Height of the chart so the data is easy to read.

14. Show the Quantity sold data values as percentages.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


15. Create a background color of dark gray and Quantities sold chart data inwhite.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 10: Formatting ChartsTask:In this exercise, you display the data in charts and format the charts to present thedata in a way that is clear and easy for report consumers to read.

1. Create a new query with State, Year and Quantity sold.

a) From the initial Interactive Analysis Desktop screen, under Universe,double-click eFashion.



d) Double-click Year so it appears in the Result Objects panel. You canalso drag the object to the Result Objects panel.



2. Create a Query Filter to restrict the data retrieved for State to California,Colorado, and DC.

a) From the Universe outline, drag State to the Query Filters panel. Youcan also drag the object from the Result Objects panel.

b) Click the button to the right of the operands field to extend thedropdown list.

c) Click Value(s) from list.

d) In the List of Values dialogue box, in the State area, double-clickCalifornia, Colorado, and DC to move them to the Selected Value(s)area.

e) Click OK.

f) Click Run query.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


3. Display the results in a bar chart.

a) Select the vertical table.

b) On the toolbar, click the Delete button.

c) Click the Report Element toolbox.

d) Click the Others tab.

e) Click the Insert a Bar Chart button.

f) Click the area of the report where you want the chart to appear.

g) In the Available Objects panel, click State, on your keyboard, press theCtrl key and click Year and Quantity sold.

h) Drag the objects and measure to the bar chart. The objects automaticallydisplay in the appropriate area of the bar chart.

4. Enlarge the width and height of the chart so the data is easy to read.

a) Click the chart so its outline displays.

b) Drag a corner of the chart outward to enlarge it.


a) Click the chart to select it.

b) Click the Report Element toolbox.

c) Click the Chart Style tab.

d) Click the Format Chart button on the toolbar.

e) In the menu to the left of the Format Chart dialog box, click CategoryAxis.

f) In the Category Axis menu, click Title.

g) Deselect Title Visible.

h) In the menu on the right of the Format Chart dialog box, click ValueAxis.

i) In the Value Axis menu, click Title.

j) Deselect Title Visible.

k) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


6. Insert a new report and create a Surface chart showing Quantity sold byState and Year.

a) Right-click the report tab and, from the contextual menu, select AddReport.

b) In the new report, right-click and, from the contextual menu, selectInsert>Insert a Report Element.

c)

d) Click the area of the report where you want to insert the surface chart.

e) In menu on the left of the Insert a report element dialog box, click Line.

f) In the area where the charts display, double-click Surface Chart.

g) In the area to the right of the dialog box, in the Category Axis field,select State.

h) In the Value Axis 1 field, select Quantity sold.

i) In the Region Color field, select Year.

j) Click OK.

7. Enlarge the width and height of the chart so it is easy to read.


b) Drag the corner of the chart outward to enlarge it.

8. Display the legend to the left of the chart.

a) Right-click the chart and, from the contextual menu, select FormatChart.

b) Click

c) In the menu on the left of the Format chart dialog box, click Legend.

d) Click Design.

e) Under Layout, in the Location field, select Left.

f) Optionally, to close the Format Chart dialog box and see the changes inthe chart, click OK.

You then need to open the Format Chart dialog box again to continuewith the next steps.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



a) In the menu on the left of the Format Chart dialog box, click CategoryAxis.

b) In the Category Axis menu, click Title.

c) Under General, deselect Title Visible option.

d) In the menu on the left of the Format Chart dialog box, click Value Axis.

e) In the Value Axis menu, click Title.

f) Under General, deselect Title Visible.

g) Optionally, to close the Format Chart dialog box and see the changes inthe chart, click OK.


10. Show the chart data values and display the values horizontally in a Bold,dark blue, 10 point font size.

a) In the menu on the right of the Format Chart dialog box, click Global.

b) In the Global menu, click Data Values.

c) Under General, click Show Data Labels.

d) In the Font area, select the font size.

e) Click the Bold button.

f) Click the Color button.

g) In the Color Palette, click the Dark Blue button.

h) In the Orientation area, click Horizontal.

i) Optionally, to close the Format Chart dialog box and see the changes inthe chart, click OK.


11. Add a chart title of Surface Area Chart.

a) In the menu of the Format Chart dialog box, click Title.

b) Select Title Visible.

c) In the Title Label field, between the quotation marks, type “SurfaceChart”

d) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


12. Insert a new report and create a Pie chart showing Quantity Sold by Year.

a) Right-click the report tab and, from the contextual menu, select AddReport.

b) In the new report, right-click and, from the contextual menu, selectInsert>Pie.

c) In the Available Objects panel, click Year, on your keyboard, press theCtrl key and click Quantity sold.

d) Drag the objects to the pie chart.

The objects automatically display in the appropriate area of the barchart.

13. Enlarge the Width and Height of the chart so the data is easy to read.


b) Drag the corner of the chart outward to enlarge it.

14. Show the Quantity sold data values as percentages.

a) Right-click the chart and, from the contextual menu, select Formatchart.

b) In the menu on the right of the Format chart dialog box, click Global.

c) In the Global menu, click Data Values.

d) Under General, select Show Data Labels.

e) In the Data Type field, select Percent.

f) Optionally, to close the Format Chart dialog box and see the changes inthe chart, click OK.




F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


15. Create a background color of dark gray and Quantities sold chart data inwhite.

a) In the menu on the right of the Format Chart dialog box, click Global.

b) In the Global menu, click Data Values.

c) In the Font area, click the Color button.

d) In the Color Palette, Click white.

e) In the Format dialog box menu, click Background.

f) Click the Color button.

g) In the Color Palette, click pale blue.

h) Click OK to close the Format chart dialog box and view the chart.




c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Define the format options for a bar chart• Define the format options for a pie chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Describe how to format each report element• Display the Format dialog box for each report element• Change the format of a report• Change the format of a table• Change the format of table header cells• Change the position of a table on the page• Change the format of cells• Change the section format• Prepare a document for PDF and printing• Define the format options for a bar chart• Define the format options for a pie chart


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. Where can you define the formatting options for a report element?

2. How can you display the Format dialog box for the report element youwant to format?

3. As a best practice, what should you do before you format a chart?

4. When you format a chart, always apply the chart style before you use theFormat dialog box to change the format options.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. Where can you define the formatting options for a report element?

Answer: In the Format dialog box that corresponds to the element and, to amore limited degree, with the options available in the Page Setup, Formatand Report Element toolboxes.

2. How can you display the Format dialog box for the report element youwant to format?

Answer: Right-click the report element in the Report Panel or in theDocument Structure and Filters pane and, from the contextual menu, selectthe corresponding Format item.

3. As a best practice, what should you do before you format a chart?

Answer: Create the chart and feed it with all its dimensions.

4. When you format a chart, always apply the chart style before you use theFormat dialog box to change the format options.

Answer: True

Apply the chart style first. Otherwise, the chart style settings can replacethe format options that you defined.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 7Calculating Data with Formulas and

Variables

Unit OverviewThis unit describes how to use formulas to display information or calculate datathat you cannot retrieve by using the existing objects in the universe. It alsoexplains how to define a formula as a document variable so that the formula isavailable for use in other reports and blocks of data in the document.


• Define formulas and variables• Explain the advantage of saving a formula as a variable• Create a variable that captures the user's response to a prompt• Create a variable to calculate sales tax• Modify a variable• Delete a variable• Create a variable from document functions

Unit ContentsLesson: Formulas and Variables.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269

Procedure: To Get Online Help .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271Lesson: Using Formulas and Variables .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

Procedure: To Create a Variable that Captures the Response to aPrompt .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274Procedure: To Define a Formula ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276Procedure: To Create a Variable from a Formula ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277Procedure: To insert a row or column in a table.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278Procedure: To Modify a Variable .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279Procedure: To Delete a Variable.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280Procedure: To Display the Author's Name as a Variable in theReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 7: Calculating Data with Formulas and Variables BOW310

Procedure: To Display the document Name as a Variable in theReport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282Exercise 11: Calculating Data with Formulas and Variables.. . . . . . . . .283


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Formulas and Variables

Lesson: Formulas and Variables

Lesson OverviewYou can add custom calculations to reports by writing a formula that InteractiveAnalysis evaluates when you refresh the report. A formula can consist of dataobjects, functions, operators and calculation contexts. You can create formulasdirectly in the report cell, but, usually, saving a formula as a variable is preferablebecause when you save a formula as a variable you can reuse it throughout thereports in a document. This saves you the time and effort of retyping a formula.


• Define formulas and variables• Explain the advantage of saving a formula as a variable

Business ExampleReport consumers want their reports to perform specific calculations tailored totheir needs. You need to understand how variables and formulas allow you todisplay the calculations in the reports.

FormulasA formula is a complex calculation that you create to display data that is notretrieved by existing objects in the universe. You can add formulas in two ways:

• Type or drag and drop the formula components into the Formula toolbar.• Use the Formula Editor to build the formula.

The first way is more suitable for experienced users. If you are not familiar withformulas, you should use the Formula Editor to build them. The Formula Editoris an interface that allows you to select the different components of your formula(operators, objects) and add them to it.

Use a formula when you require a calculation for a table and do not need to useit again.

VariablesA variable is a formula that you save with a name and, based on the formula, aqualification is automatically assigned to it. It acts as an object in the document,and is displayed in the Available Objects pane in the Interactive Analysis mainwindow just like any other data object. You can then use the variable as youwould any object: to display the results of the calculation in multiple blocks andreports throughout the Interactive Analysis document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


The advantage to creating a variable is that you can reuse the formula withouthaving to enter it each time. Variables are defined according to the formula youenter when you create them, but they behave like standard objects in the queryand document. They are saved in the document and so can be used in any reportwithin the document.

Given the advantages of a variable, when possible, create a variable insteadof a formula. When required, you can create a formula and later convert it to avariable, but creating the variable directly saves you time and effort.

Variables are useful when you require a calculation and plan to use it more thanonce and in different blocks and report tabs within your document.

Getting Online HelpAt any moment, you can access the Interactive Analysis online help about creatingformulas, as well as about saving them as variables in the report. The online Helpincludes a complete list of all the functions that are available for creating formulasin Interactive Analysis, as well as examples on how to use them.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Formulas and Variables

To Get Online Help

1. From the Formula Editor or Create Variable dialog box, click the Help icon.

The Online documentation for SAP BusinessObjects Interactive AnalysisDesktop displays.

2. On the Contents tab, click Using functions, formulas, and calculations inInteractive Analysis.

Links to specific Help topics display.

3. Click the appropriate link for the topic that interests you.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Define formulas and variables• Explain the advantage of saving a formula as a variable


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using Formulas and Variables

Lesson: Using Formulas and Variables

Lesson OverviewThere are many different reasons why you may choose to create variables anddefine formulas that calculate and display data in your report that you cannotretrieve using the objects in the universe.

In this lesson, you learn three methods for creating new variables and theirassociated formulas:

• Creating a variable that captures the report user's response to a prompt whenhe or she refreshed the report and, then, displaying the value in a cell orother element in the report.

• Creating a variable that calculates data and, then, projecting the calculationin a new column.

• Using document functions to create a variable that displays information aboutyour document in a report, for example, the author and document name.

Note: When you create a formula, you always begin with the equal (=)sign and report objects always appear inside brackets ([ ]).


• Create a variable that captures the user's response to a prompt• Create a variable to calculate sales tax• Modify a variable• Delete a variable• Create a variable from document functions

Business ExampleReport consumers want to see in their reports information and calculations thatthe query does not retrieve and the standard calculations cannot perform. Tosatisfy their needs, you can use formulas and variables to calculate and displaysuch information.

Creating a Variable as a Response to a PromptWhen you create a report that prompts users to select the values on which theywant to filter the report data, you can also create a formula that allows you to usethe user selected prompt values in the title of the report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Variable that Captures the Response toa PromptUseTo successfully create the variable, you must enter the exact prompt value textthat you entered when you created the prompt. The data provider has stored thatvalue and the text you enter in the formula must match it exactly for the formulato be valid. Before you create the variable, you may want to edit the prompt andcopy the prompt value text into a text file from which you can copy it when youcreate the formula.

Procedure1. In a report that uses a prompted query filter, to display the Formula Bar, in

the Left Panel, click the Properties tab.

2. Click View and, from the dropdown menu, select Formula Bar

The Formula Bar displays at the top of the report.

3. Click the cell where you want the prompt response to display, for example,the Report Title cell.

A gray border appears around the cell to show that is selected and thecontents of the cell display in the Formula Bar.

4. On the Formula toolbar, click Create Variable.

The Create Variable dialog box displays.

In the Create Variable dialog box, you define the characteristics of a formulaby selecting data objects, functions and operators from the lists in the tabs.The formula appears in the Formula area as you build it.

5. In the Formula area, when required, delete all the text, but the = (equal sign)that starts the formula definition.

6. Type the text you want to appear before the prompt value in the cell. Thetext must be surrounded by quotes. For example:

"Quarterly Revenues for "

7. In the Operators list, click + (plus sign).

8. In the Functions area, expand the Data Provider folder.

9. Double-click UserResponse.

You may need to scroll down in the Functions list to display this function.

10. Within the parenthesis, type the prompt text you used when you created theprompt. The text must be surrounded by quotes. For example:



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


"Enter values for State:"

The text must match the prompt text exactly and is case-sensitive.

11. Click Validate to check the syntax of the formula.

12. Click OK.

The cell displays the results of the formula you created as a variable and alsodisplays the value of the object selected in the prompt.


Creating a FormulaThe steps for creating a formula are similar to those for creating a variable and theFormula Editor dialog box is similar to the Create Variable dialog box. However,the Formula Editor dialog box does not contain a Name, Qualification and Typefields.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Define a Formula

1. To display the Formula Bar, in the Left Panel, click the Properties tab

2. Click View and, from the dropdown menu, select Formula Bar

3. Select the cell where you want to enter the formula.

4. Click Formula Editor on the Formula bar to display the Formula editor.

5. Build the formula using the Formula Editor.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Create a Variable from a Formula

1. Select the cell that contains the formula.

The Formula bar displays the definition of the formula.

2. On the Formula bar, click Create Variable.

The Create Variable dialog box displays and in the Formula area, the formuladisplays.

3. Type a name in the Name field.

4. In the Qualification field, select a value.

5. Click OK.

The variable displays in the Available Objects pane.

Creating a Variable for Complex CalculationsWhen you create a formula that you want to be able to easily reuse in a document,you need to save it as a variable.

You can also use the value of one variable as the basis of the calculation of anothervariable. By building one variable on another, you can display the results ofcomplex calculations in a variable.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To insert a row or column in a table

1. In the report, right-click a cell in a row or column beside, above, or belowwhere you want to insert a new row or column and, from the contextualmenu, select Insert.

A drop-down menu appears that allows you to insert columns before andafter or rows above and below the cell you selected.

2. Click the appropriate item in the drop-down menu.

A column or row is inserted in the location you selected.


Modifying and Deleting a VariableYou can modify or delete a variable in the Available Objects pane in the InteractiveAnalysis main window.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Modify a Variable

1. In the Available Objects pane, right-click the variable and, from thecontextual menu, select Edit.

The Variable Editor dialog box displays.

2. Edit the variable.

3. Click OK to save the new variable definition.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Delete a Variable

1. In the Available Objects pane, right-click the variable and, from thecontextual menu, select Delete.

Note: When the variable you try to delete is used in a report,a message box warns that this variable is used in reports in thedocument.

2. To proceed with the deletion, click Yes.

Creating a Variable from Document FunctionsYou can use document functions to create a variable that displays informationabout your document, such as the author and document name in a report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Display the Author's Name as a Variable in theReport

1. From the report, click the Report Element toolbox.


3. Click Blank.

4. Click the area in the report where you want the document information todisplay.

5. On the Formula bar, click Create Variable.

The Create Variable dialog box displays.

6. In the Name field, type the name of the variable.

7. In the Measure field, select a value.

8. In the Functions area, click + to expand the Document folder.

9. Double-click DocumentAuthor to insert this function in the Formula area.

The function selected appears in the Formula area.

10. Click Validate to check the syntax of the formula.

11. Click OK.

The Create Variable dialog box closes and the new cell in the report displaysthe username of the document's author.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Display the document Name as a Variable in theReport

1. From the report, click the Report Element toolbox.


3. Click Pre-Defined and, from the dropdown menu, select Document name.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 11: Calculating Data withFormulas and Variables

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Use formulas and variables to display information that you cannot retrieve

by using he existing objects in the universe• Use formulas and variables to calculate data that you cannot retrieve by using

he existing objects in the universe

Business ExampleReport users want information about the document, such as the user response to aprompt, and a calculation that increases the figure for quantity sold by 20 percent.Use formulas and variables to satisfy their requirement.

Task:Create a document that prompts a user to restrict the data displayed with aprompt, use document functions to display document information in the reportand variables to display the results of calculations.

1. Build a query using the Lines and Quantity sold objects.

2. Restrict the query so that you are prompted to select the Year and State.

3. Remove the title cell from the report and insert two new blank cells.

4. Use the UserResponse() function to capture the answers the prompted queryfilter on State and to display it in the blank cells.

5. Use the UserResponse() function to capture the answers the prompted queryfilter on Year and to display it in the blank cells.

6. Insert a blank cell in the lower right-hand corner next to the table.

7. Use the DocumentAuthor() function to display the user's name in the blankcell.

8. Create a new variable called PLUS to display 20% of the Quantity sold value.

9. Insert the PLUS variable into a new column in the table.

10. Create a second variable called TOTAL to calculate the values for Quantitysold plus the values returned by the PLUS variable.

11. Insert the TOTAL variable into a new column in the table

12. Save the document as Activity Formulas Variables and closethe document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 11: Calculating Data withFormulas and VariablesTask:Create a document that prompts a user to restrict the data displayed with aprompt, use document functions to display document information in the reportand variables to display the results of calculations.

1. Build a query using the Lines and Quantity sold objects.

a) Under Choose a data source to create a new document, click eFashion.

b) Extend the Product class to display the objects that it contains.

c) Double-click Lines so it appears in the Result Objects panel. You canalso drag the object to the Result Objects panel.


e) Double-click Quantity sold so it appears in the Result Objects panel.You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

2. Restrict the query so that you are prompted to select the Year and State.

a) Drag the Year object to the Query Filters panel.

b) In the query filter, display the dropdown menu to the right of theoperand field and select Prompt.

c) In the Universe outline, extend the Store class to display the objectsthat it contains.

d) Drag State to the Query Filters panel.

e) In the query filter, display the dropdown menu to the right of theoperand field and select Prompt.

f) Click Run query.

g) In the prompt, select a single year value and a single state value.

3. Remove the title cell from the report and insert two new blank cells.

a) Right click the title cell and, from the contextual menu, select Delete.

b) Click the Report Element toolbox.

c) Click the Cell tab.

d) Click Blank.

e) Click the area of the report where you want to display the blank cell.

f) Repeat steps d-e to insert a second blank cell.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


4. Use the UserResponse() function to capture the answers the prompted queryfilter on State and to display it in the blank cells.

a) Click the first blank cell to select it.

b) Click the Formula Editor button on the Formula Bar.

c) In the Formula Editor dialog box, in the Formula field, type the textyou want to appear before the prompt value in the report title betweenquotation marks.

For example: ““Year = ”“

d) In the Operators list, double-click + (plus sign).

e) In the Functions list, click to expand the Data Provider folder.

f) Double-click UserResponse.

g) Within the parentheses, type the prompt text you used when you createdthe prompt. You must place the text between quotation marks.

For example: ““Enter State:”” The text must match the prompttext exactly and is case-sensitive.

h) Click the Validate button to check the syntax of the formula.

i) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


5. Use the UserResponse() function to capture the answers the prompted queryfilter on Year and to display it in the blank cells.

a) Click the second blank cell to select it.

b) Click the Formula Editor button on the Formula Bar.

c) In the Formula Editor dialog box, in the Formula field, type the textyou want to appear before the prompt value in the report title betweenquotation marks.

For example:”“State = ””.

d) In the Operators list, double-click + (plus sign).

e) In the Functions list, click to expand the Data Provider folder.

f) Double-click UserResponse.

g) Within the parentheses, type the prompt text you used when youcreated the prompt.

You must place the text between quotation marks.

For example: ""Enter Year:”".

The text must match the prompt text exactly and is case-sensitive.

h) Click the Validate button to check the syntax of the formula.

i) Click OK.

The cells display the values entered by the user in response to theprompt.

6. Insert a blank cell in the lower right-hand corner next to the table.

a) Click the Report Element toolbox.

b) Click the Cell tab.

c) Click Blank.

d) Click the area of the report where you want to display the blank cell.

7. Use the DocumentAuthor() function to display the user's name in the blankcell.

a) Right-click the blank cell and, from the contextual menu, select EditFormula.

b) In the Formula Editor dialog box, in the Functions list, click to expandthe Document folder.

c) Double-click DocumentAuthor.

d) Click OK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


8. Create a new variable called PLUS to display 20% of the Quantity sold value.

a) Under Available Objects, right-click the Variables folder.

b) Click New Variable.

c) In the Create Variable dialog box, in the Name field, type PLUS.

d) In the Qualification field, select Measure.

e) Place your cursor in the Formula field.

f) Under Available objects, double-click Quantity sold.

g) Under Operators, click * (asterisk).

h) Place your cursor in the Formula field after the * (asterisk).

i) On your keyboard, type .20.

j) Optionally, click Validate.

k) Click OK.

9. Insert the PLUS variable into a new column in the table.

a) Drag the PLUS variable to the right edge of the table.

10. Create a second variable called TOTAL to calculate the values for Quantitysold plus the values returned by the PLUS variable.

a) Under Available Objects, right-click the Variables folder.

b) Click New Variable.

c) In the Create Variable dialog box, in the Name field, type TOTAL.

d) In the Qualification field, select Measure.

e) Under Available objects, double-click Quantity sold.

f) Under Operators, click + (plus).

g) Under Available objects, double-click PLUS.

h) Optionally, click Validate.

i) Click OK.

11. Insert the TOTAL variable into a new column in the table

a) Drag the TOTAL variable to the right edge of the table.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


12. Save the document as Activity Formulas Variables and closethe document.



c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Create a variable that captures the user's response to a prompt• Create a variable to calculate sales tax• Modify a variable• Delete a variable• Create a variable from document functions


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Define formulas and variables• Explain the advantage of saving a formula as a variable• Create a variable that captures the user's response to a prompt• Create a variable to calculate sales tax• Modify a variable• Delete a variable• Create a variable from document functions


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What are the advantages of using variables.

2. How can you check a formula to make sure the syntax is correct?


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What are the advantages of using variables.

Answer: By creating variables, you can easily reuse the variable throughoutthe document by dragging and dropping it into blocks in the report.

2. How can you check a formula to make sure the syntax is correct?

Answer: By clicking the Validate button in either the Formula toolbar or theFormula Editor.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 8Using Multiple Data Sources

Unit OverviewThis lesson describes how Interactive Analysis allows you to include blocks ofdata from different data sources in a single document. It presents concepts of datasynchronization, the ability to merge data from multiple sources into a singleblock in a document.


• Understand concepts of data synchronization• Project data from a single query in different report blocks• Project data from more than one query using a single universe• Set options to automatically merge dimensions with the same name• Project data from queries using multiple universes and personal data sources• Explain why it is important to merge dimensions that retrieve related data• Synchronize data by manually merging dimensions• List rules that are important to be aware of when merging dimensions• Upload personal data to a document• Link personal data to universe data

Unit ContentsLesson: Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data Sources ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295Lesson: Creating Multiple Queries in a Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299

Procedure: To Project Data from a Single Query into MultipleBlocks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301Procedure: To Project Data from Two Queries into Multiple Blocks .302Procedure: To Project Data from a Merged Dimension into a SingleBlock ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Procedure: To Change the Automatic Merge Dimension Setting ... .305Procedure: To Project Data from Two Data Sources into MultipleBlocks ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306

Lesson: Synchronizing Data with Merged Dimensions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 8: Using Multiple Data Sources BOW310

Procedure: To Manually Merge Dimensions from DifferentUniverses ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310

Lesson: Using a Personal Data Provider .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313Procedure: To Upload Personal Data to a Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314Procedure: To Link Personal Data to Universe Data ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316Exercise 12: Synchronizing Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data Sources

Lesson: Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data Sources

Lesson OverviewYou can include one or more queries in a single Interactive Analysis document.When you include multiple queries, those queries can be based on a singleuniverse or on multiple universes available to you in BI launch pad.

You can also include data in your document that you retrieve from data files, suchas Excel spreadsheets, text files and CSV files. These data sources are knownas local data providers.

For example, in your organization you may use one universe to access dataon product line sales. You also use another universe to access customer data.Typically one universe is built for each functional area. Therefore, if you wereworking with both sales data and customer demographics, chances are good thatthe data would come from two separate universes.

You want to present product line sales results and information on customer agegroups in the same report. To do this, you create a single document that includesdata retrieved by two queries; each query is built using a different universe. Youcan then include and format the results from both queries in the same report.

The system administrator assigns rights for access to specific universes.


• Understand concepts of data synchronization

Business ExampleReport users may want to combine data from more than one data source. Theymay want information that require two different universes to retrieve or they maywant to use data they store in an Excel spreadsheet or text file. To satisfy suchrequirements, you need to be familiar with how to work with multiple data sourcesand understand concepts of data synchronization.

Working with Multiple Data ProvidersWhen you run a query against a single data source, the results of the queryare stored in the document's microcube, and the query is identified as a dataprovider. You can also retrieve data using local data files, such as such as Excelspreadsheets, text files and CSV files. All of these data sources, queries as well aslocal data files, are known as "data providers" in Interactive Analysis.

Each data provider only holds data from a single data source.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


This is very useful when you want to include data from several sources in a singledocument - irrespective of the format of the original source. It also means youcan present related information in a way that helps you compare or analyze datamore meaningfully.

Once the basic report is built with blocks of related data, you can compare andcontrast the information in a single table, add calculations across data sources,create new variables and develop the analysis further.

Figure 7: Using Multiple Data Sources

For example, you can create a document that contains:

• Two data blocks to display different views of the data provider created by asingle query using the Universe A.

• A third block to display a view of the data provider created by a secondquery using the Universe A. A document that displays Blocks 1, 2, and 3 isan example of combining data from multiple queries using a single universe.

• A fourth block to display a view of the data provider created by a queryusing Universe B. A document that displays block 4 with blocks 1, 2, and3, views of data from Universe A, is an example of combining data frommultiple queries on multiple universes.

What is Data Synchronization?This lesson describes how to synchronize multiple data providers in a InteractiveAnalysis report by merging them on common dimensions. After merging commondimensions you can place dimensions from different data providers in the sameblock.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Synchronizing Data from Multiple Data Sources

Merged dimensions and data synchronization enormously increase the powerand flexibility of Interactive Analysis by allowing you to synthesize data fromdifferent sources in the same report, rather than simply including the data.

Synchronization is the term used to describe the merging of data from multipledata sources into a single block in a report.

Figure 8: Synchronizing Data from Multiple Sources

When you combine data from more than one source in synchronized blocks, youcan create a document that contains:

• One block that combines data from two different data providers whichcontain the results of queries using the Universe A.

• A second block that combines data from data providers which contain theresults of queries using both Universe A and Universe B.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Understand concepts of data synchronization


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Creating Multiple Queries in a Document

Lesson: Creating Multiple Queries in a Document

Lesson OverviewIn this lesson, you learn to project data from several queries into multiple datablocks in an Interactive Analysis document.


• Project data from a single query in different report blocks• Project data from more than one query using a single universe• Set options to automatically merge dimensions with the same name• Project data from queries using multiple universes and personal data sources

Business ExampleRetrieving the information that report users need can require you to show datafrom one query in different report blocks, to create multiple queries on oneuniverse, to query more than one universe and to query personal data sources.

Projecting Data from a Single Query into DifferentBlocksYou can use multiple blocks of data to project different views of data from a singlequery. Two blocks can show different sets of data retrieved from the same query,and the same universe. For example, you can retrieve data in a single query oneFashion and create one block that shows sales revenue per state and a secondblock that shows sales margin per year.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Figure 9: Projecting Data from a Single Query into Different Blocks


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Project Data from a Single Query into MultipleBlocks

1. Create a new document using several objects.

The report now displays a single block of data.

2. Select a few of the objects from the Available Objects pane and drag theminto the report, next to the first block of data.

The report now displays two blocks of data. The first shows all the objectsin the query, and the second shows data involving only those objects youdragged into the report.

Both blocks were built using data from a single query.


Projecting Data from Multiple Queries Using a SingleUniverseIf the document contains a set of data returned by an existing query, you havealready seen how to edit the query to include more objects, and expand the datacontained in the data provider.

You can also choose to add a second query to the document, select differentobjects from the same universe, and expand the document's data by using twoseparate data providers.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Project Data from Two Queries into Multiple Blocks

1. Click the Data Access toolbox.

2. Click Edit on the Data Provider tab to begin adding the second query.


3. Click the Add Query button on the toolbar and, from the dropdown menu,select From Universe.

The Universe dialog box displays.

4. Select the appropriate universe for the second query.

5. Click Select.

A second tab appears in the Query Panel. Note that at the bottom of thepanel, there are two tabs now: Query 1 and Query 2. You can use these tabsto toggle back and forth between the two query definitions.

6. Right-click the query tab, select Rename.

7. In the New value field, type a query name and press the Return key to replacethe default name of this query.

8. Double-click the objects for which you want to retrieve the data.

9. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Run Queries button.

The Add Query dialog box displays the choice of options for how to includethe data from the new query.

Option Description

Insert a table in a new report Display the data on a new report inthe document.

Insert a table in the current report Display the data on the currentlyselected report in a new table.

Include the result objects in thedocument without generating a table

Include the data in the documentwithout displaying the data on areport. (You can add the objectsreturned by the query to the reportlater.)

Not generating a table gives you more control over where you want to insertthe new data. When you choose to insert a new table, you cannot determineits position in the report. It can even display on top of the existing tables.

10. Select the option for how to handle the data from the new query and clickOK.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


11. In the Available Objects pane, the objects that you included in both queriesdisplay in two levels:

• The top-level object is identified by a double-cubed, blue dimensionicon, indicating that the two have been automatically merged to create asingle- dimension object.

• The second level shows a dimension icon, the dimension name and thename of the different queries next to them.

Now you are ready to project the data from both queries into a single blockin the report.

12. At the bottom of the Objects window, click the drop-down arrow forArranged by: Alphabetic Order.

13. Select Query.

14. The object listing changes to show the objects grouped by query.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Project Data from a Merged Dimension into a SingleBlock

1. In your report, from the Available Objects pane, select all required objects,including a merged object, and drop them in the report.

The data displays in a single block of data even though it has been retrievedby two different queries.

About Automatically Merged DimensionsWhen you use the same object in two different queries, Interactive Analysisautomatically merges the two instances of the same object and creates a combinedobject, identified by the double-cubed dimension icon, as shown here.

The objects are shown as combined into a single object because the Store nameobjects come from the same universe and, as a result, have the same object anduniverse ID.

Interactive Analysis automatically merges dimensions only when the same objectis used in more than one query in a document. Ideally, a well-designed universedoes not have two different objects of the same name, or of different data types,but if this does occur and you use them in more than one query in a document,Interactive Analysis will automatically merge them.

If you do not want Interactive Analysis to automatically merge multiple instancesof the same object in a single document, you can clear the Auto-merge dimensionsoption in the Document Summary pane or dialog box.

In the Document Summary panel or dialog box, the Auto-merge dimensions optiontells Interactive Analysis whether it should automatically merge a dimension whenthe same object is used in more than one query in a single document.

When you clear this option, your change takes effect the next time you create adocument with two queries that reference the same object.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Change the Automatic Merge Dimension Setting

1. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, in the Left pane, click theDocument Summary button.

The Document Summary pane displays in the Left pane.

2. At the tope of the Document Summary pane, click Edit.

3. Clear or select the Auto-merge dimensions option.

• Select the option to automatically merge a dimension when the sameobject is used in more than one query in a single document.

• Clear the option if you do not want the dimensions to be automaticallymerged.

When you clear this option, the change takes effect the next time you createa document with two queries that reference the same object.

Projecting Data from Queries Using Multiple UniversesYou have used data from a single universe to produce multiple blocks in reports.These blocks are views of data providers with data retrieved using a singleuniverse.

You can also build a query against a different universe and include the dataretrieved as a new data provider in the document.

Figure 10: Working with Multiple Data Providers


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Project Data from Two Data Sources into MultipleBlocks

1. Click the Data Access toolbox.

2. Click Edit to add a new query.

3. Click Add Query and, from the dropdown menu, select From Universe.

The Universe dialog box displays.

4. Select the appropriate data source for the new query.

5. Click Select.

A new tab appears in the Query Panel.

6. In the new query tab, move the necessary objects into the Result Objectspanel.

7. Right-click Query 2 tab and from the drop-down menu, select Rename.

8. In the New value field, type the query name and press the Return key toreplace the default name of the first query as well.

9. Click the Run Queries button.

The Add Query dialog box displays.

10. Select Include the results objects without generating a table and click OK.

The objects from the new query now appear in the Available Objects panel.

11. In the report, click the tab for the first report.

12. From the data tab, drag the objects for the new query to the Document zoneuntil they are positioned next to the existing table.

A new table is inserted next to the existing table and the table from the newquery is projected into the new table:



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Project data from a single query in different report blocks• Project data from more than one query using a single universe• Set options to automatically merge dimensions with the same name• Project data from queries using multiple universes and personal data sources


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Synchronizing Data with Merged Dimensions

Lesson OverviewIn the previous exercise you have seen how to project data from multiple queriesin a document from both single and multiple universes.

So far, you have not tried to merge data from different data sources into a singleblock (table or chart). To do this, you need to synchronize the data by mergingdimensions. Because the data comes from two different data providers, when youdo not synchronize the dimensions with similar data, Interactive Analysis cannotknow in what way the data is related and your report will not show relevant results.


• Explain why it is important to merge dimensions that retrieve related data• Synchronize data by manually merging dimensions• List rules that are important to be aware of when merging dimensions

Business ExampleReport users want to combine data from multiple data sources in one document,but also in one data block. You need to know how to synchronize data withmerged dimensions so that when you combine the data in a single block, theinformation that displays is accurate and meaningful.

What Happens When Dimensions are notSynchronized?In the previous exercise, you retrieved data concerning stores, but you used twodimension objects that had different names, even though they retrieved similardata:

• The Store name object in the "Revenue query" and the "Margin query", fromthe eFashion universe.

• The Store object in the "Employee query", from the eStaff universe.

Because the dimension objects come from different universes, Interactive Analysiscannot automatically merge the dimensions. If you try to combine data from thetwo objects in a single block, Interactive Analysis will not automatically be able tointerpret the relationship between them.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Synchronizing Data with Merged Dimensions

Synchronizing Queries by Manually MergingDimensionsYou can define the relationship between objects from different universes bymanually merging the dimensions to synchronize the data they retrieve. Mergingdimensions manually allows you to identify the objects that retrieve common datain both queries. After you merge the dimension, you can compare informationbetween the queries more accurately.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Manually Merge Dimensions from DifferentUniverses

1. In the Interactive Analysis Desktop main window, ensure that the DataAccess toolbar is displayed.

2. Optionally, to view the dimension objects available for merging withdimension you want to merge, in the Available Objects panel, click thedimension you want to manually merge.

Note: All the dimension objects listed in the Available Objects paneldisplay in italics. These objects are highlighted in italics becausethey are all the same type of object as the selected object: that is,they are all dimension objects. Interactive Analysis indicates thatyou could choose to merge the selected object with any of the otherdimension objects in the document's queries.

3. Click the Merge button on the Data Objects tab.

The Available Objects dialog box displays.

The dimensions that are available to be merged appear in the top zone of thisdialog box, categorized by the query that they belong to.

Below and to the left is a list of any merged dimensions that already existin the document.

4. In the Available Objects dialog box, select two or more of the dimensionsyou want to merge.

5. Click OK.

Now, you see in the Available Objects pane that the merged dimension youcreated includes both of the dimensions you selected to merge.

This is known as synchronizing data using merged dimensions.

When you project data into a block using this merged dimension, it retrievesdata from both queries.

When you merge dimensions, Interactive Analysis creates a new dimensionthat retrieves all the values from all the original dimensions that make upthe merged dimension.


Rules about Synchronizing with Merged DimensionsMerging dimensions is the process of creating a link between two queries basedon an object with common values so that in effect the objects become one.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Synchronizing Data with Merged Dimensions

There are a number of rules to remember when merging dimensions from multiplequeries:

• You can only link on dimension objects, for example, Store name and Store.• The dimension objects do not have to have the same names.• The dimension objects must have a common data format. For example, if one

object is character-based and the other numeric you cannot link the objects.• Although the actual values do not have to be the same, all data held in a

data provider is case-sensitive, and therefore any common values must bein the same case.

• The format of the values must be the same. For example, FY04 and 2004would be seen as two separate values. Extra spaces in some values can alsomean that the objects cannot be merged.

• Any number of queries can be linked by common dimension objects.• Any number of dimension objects can be merged between two queries.• A measure object can be synchronized successfully only to the lowest level of

detail that is common between the two different data sources. For example,a query with Year can be linked with another query with Year and Month.However, the synchronized block is only able to display data at the Year level.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Explain why it is important to merge dimensions that retrieve related data• Synchronize data by manually merging dimensions• List rules that are important to be aware of when merging dimensions


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Using a Personal Data Provider

Lesson: Using a Personal Data Provider

Lesson OverviewInteractive Analysis allows you to enrich corporate data with personal data thatyou upload to a document.


• Upload personal data to a document• Link personal data to universe data

Business ExampleReport users may want reports to contain data from personal data sources, forexample, an Excel spreadsheet. You can satisfy this requirement by uploadingpersonal data to a report.

Using Personal DataThe Interactive Analysis Desktop application allows you to upload personal datato a document along with corporate data. Acceptable personal data formats are:

• Excel• Text• CSV

Note: When a query is based on a personal data file and you refresh thequery, Interactive Analysis Desktop searches for the personal data filein specific files:

• The folder where the local data file was stored when the dataprovider was created.

• The same folder as the Interactive Analysis document.• The default user document folder (C:\Documents and

Settings\%currentUser%\My Documents\My Business ObjectsDocuments\userDocs).

When Interactive Analysis Desktop does not find the data file in one of thefollowing locations, an error message displays.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Upload Personal Data to a Document

1. How you upload personal data depends on whether you are creating the firstquery in a document or adding a query to an existing document:

To Follow these steps

Create a new document andits first query on a personaldata provider

From the initial window of the InteractiveAnalysis, in the Choose a data source tocreate a new document area, click the linkfor the type of personal data provider youwant to use:

• Excel• Text: Use this link for *.txt or *.csv

files.

Add a query on a personaldata provider to a documentthat already contains at leastone query

1. From the document, in the DataAccess toolbox, on the Data Providertab, click Edit.


2. Click Add Query and, from thedrop-down menu, select the personaldata provider you want to use:

• Excel• Text: Use this link for *.txt or

*.csv files.

2. In the Custom Provider dialog box, click Browse to navigate to the personaldata provider option.

The Choose File dialog box displays.

3. Select the personal data provider and click Open.

Depending on the format of your personal data file, the Custom Providerdialog box displays the options that you can define for the data and display:

• For a Text or CSV file, the dialog box allows you to specify the dataseparator, text delimiter, locale and date format.

• For an Excel file, the dialog box allows you to specify the sheet nameand the field selection.

4. Define the options.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


5. To display the column heading for your data in the first row of your report,select First row contains column names.

6. Click Next.

The Query panel displays.

In the Query panel, you see:

• In the Result Objects panel, objects corresponding to the column ofdata in your personal data provider.

• A Data Sample panel that displays some of the data in your personaldata provider.

• The Object Properties panel where you can define the objects fromyour personal data provider.

7. To define an object, select it in the Result Objects panel and, in the ObjectProperties panel, select the appropriate qualification.

8. Click Run query.

Your personal data displays in your Interactive Analysis document.


Linking Personal Data to Universe DataGenerally, personal data allows you to supplement the data from the universewith additional, pertinent information. In some cases, the data from the universeand a local data provider is most meaningful when you can present it in a singletable or data block.

Just as when you combine data from separate universes, you need to synchronizethe data from a universe and local data provider. You can use the Merge buttonto select common dimensions from queries on different data sources and mergethem into a single dimension.

Remember that the dimensions must be the same data type and retrievesemantically-related data in order for them to qualify as merged dimensions.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Link Personal Data to Universe DataUseYou can merge the data from a personal data provider with data from a universefrom within the document that contains objects from these data sources.

Procedure1. Optionally, to view the dimension objects available for merging with

dimension you want to merge, in the Available Objects panel, click thedimension you want to manually merge.

Note: All the dimension objects listed in the Available Objects paneldisplay in italics. These objects are highlighted in italics becausethey are all the same type of object as the selected object: that is,they are all dimension objects. Interactive Analysis indicates thatyou could choose to merge the selected object with any of the otherdimension objects in the document's queries.

2. On the Data Provider tab, click Merge.

The Available Objects dialog box displays.

The dimensions that are available to be merged appear in the top zone of thisdialog box, categorized by the query that they belong to.

Below is a list of any merged dimensions that already exist in the document.

3. In the Available Objects dialog box, select two or more dimensions thatyou want to merge.

To select more than one dimension, click the first dimension, press the Ctrlkey and click the other dimensions.

4. Click OK.

Now, you see in the Available Objects pane that the merged dimension youcreated includes both of the dimensions you selected to merge.

This is known as synchronizing data using merged dimensions.

When you project data into a block using this merged dimension, it retrievesdata from both queries.

When you merge dimensions, Interactive Analysis creates a new dimensionthat retrieves all the values from all the original dimensions that make upthe merged dimension.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 12: Synchronizing Data

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Create a new document that retrieves data from two different universes• Synchronize the data from two different data providers• Project data from two different universes into a single table

Business ExampleReport consumers want to see data from two different universes in a singledocument. Synchronize the data from the universes so the data that displays in thedocument is accurate and meaningful.

Task:Create a document that queries two different universes, manually merge the datafrom the universes to synchronize it and project the data in a single table.

1. Create a new document showing Sales revenue by State.

2. Add a new query to the document using the eStaff universe.

3. Build a query that retrieves Total Salaries by State.

4. Synchronize the results displayed in the two tables to display both the Salesrevenue and Salary per State in a single data block.

5. Display the results for Sales revenue and Salary per state in a third table.

6. Save your document as Activity MultiDP and close the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 12: Synchronizing DataTask:Create a document that queries two different universes, manually merge the datafrom the universes to synchronize it and project the data in a single table.

1. Create a new document showing Sales revenue by State.



c) Double-click State so it appears in the Result Objects panel.

You can also drag the object to the Result Objects panel.


e) Double-click the Sales revenue measure so it appears in the ResultObjects panel.

You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

f) Click Run query.

2. Add a new query to the document using the eStaff universe.



c) Click Add Query and, from the dropdown menu, click From Universe.

d) In the Universe dialog box, double-click eSTAFF.

3. Build a query that retrieves Total Salaries by State.

a) Extend the Employee class to display the objects that it contains.

b) Double-click State so it appears in the Result Objects panel.

You can also drag the object to the Result Objects panel.

c) Extend the Measures class to display the measures that it contains.

d) Double-click the Total Salaries measure so it appears in the ResultObjects panel.

You can also drag the measure to the Result Objects panel.

e) Click Run query.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


4. Synchronize the results displayed in the two tables to display both the Salesrevenue and Salary per State in a single data block.


b) On the Data Objects tab, click the Merge button.

c) In the Available objects dialog box, under Query 1, click State.

d) Press the Ctrl key and, under Query 2, click State.

e) Click OK.

5. Display the results for Sales revenue and Salary per state in a third table.

a) From the Available objects pane, click the merged State object andpress the Ctrl key.

b) Click Sales revenue and Salary.

c) Drag the objects to the report.

6. Save your document as Activity MultiDP and close the document.



c) Click Save.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Upload personal data to a document• Link personal data to universe data


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Understand concepts of data synchronization• Project data from a single query in different report blocks• Project data from more than one query using a single universe• Set options to automatically merge dimensions with the same name• Project data from queries using multiple universes and personal data sources• Explain why it is important to merge dimensions that retrieve related data• Synchronize data by manually merging dimensions• List rules that are important to be aware of when merging dimensions• Upload personal data to a document• Link personal data to universe data


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What term describes the ability to combine blocks of data from different datasources in a single report document?

2. What is the term to describe where the results of a query run against auniverse are stored?

3. How do you combine data from multiple sources into a single block?

4. Where can you change automatic merge dimension settings for a specificdocument?

5. You can only merge dimensions that have a common data format.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

6. For personal data, Interactive Analysis assigns the qualification and typeof object.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What term describes the ability to combine blocks of data from different datasources in a single report document?

Answer: Synchronization.

2. What is the term to describe where the results of a query run against auniverse are stored?

Answer: Data provider

3. How do you combine data from multiple sources into a single block?

Answer: By merging dimension objects that retrieve related data.

4. Where can you change automatic merge dimension settings for a specificdocument?

Answer: In the Document Summary pane or dialog box.

5. You can only merge dimensions that have a common data format.

Answer: True

True. For example, you cannot merge a character-based dimension with anumeric dimension.

6. For personal data, Interactive Analysis assigns the qualification and typeof object.

Answer: False

You must assign the qualification and type of object for personal data whenyou define the query.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 9Analyzing Data

Unit OverviewThis unit describes how to create documents that you or other users can analyzein drill mode.

When viewing data at a summary level, you may also want to analyze the data atlower levels to identify the trends or reasons behind that data. By drilling throughdata, you can quickly and precisely move through data hierarchies to view thedetails at a lower level.


• Describe how data retrieved by a query is stored in the document data cube• Explain scope of analysis• Build a drillable document• Drill down in a data hierarchy while viewing a document• Drill in charts

Unit ContentsLesson: Analyzing the Data Cube ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326Lesson: Drilling in an Interactive Analysis Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330

Procedure: To Build a Drillable Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331Procedure: To Activate Drill Mode... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333Procedure: To Drill across Data in a Hierarchy ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334Procedure: To Drill Down Two Hierarchies at Once ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335Procedure: To Edit the Scope of Analysis.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336Procedure: To Drill in Charts .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 9: Analyzing Data BOW310

Lesson: Analyzing the Data Cube

Lesson OverviewDrill mode is a feature that allows you to view data from different levels of detailand zoom in on different trends. If a Interactive Analysis document has beenenabled for drill analysis, users viewing the document either in BI launch pad or inthe Interactive Analysis Desktop can drill down to get more details on one of thedata objects used in a table or chart.


• Describe how data retrieved by a query is stored in the document data cube• Explain scope of analysis

Business ExampleReport users want to explore data at multiple hierarchical levels. You need tounderstand the storage of data in the document data cube and the scope of analysisfor a query to design reports that meet their need.

About the Interactive Analysis Data CubeThe data that is returned by a query is stored in the document’s data provider. It isconvenient to visualize the returned data as being organized as a cube. In yourdocument, the data is displayed as a table. The table is a flat two-dimensionalview of the data cube.

Figure 11: The Query Process from the Business User's Perspective


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Analyzing the Data Cube

Each of the columns in a table represents an axis in the cube. You can edit thedocument by swapping and manipulating the data within the cube on any axis.When you swap or change data between different axes, the new result is againprojected as a flat table in the resulting document.

The data stored in the cube allows you to create a report that corresponds to yourbusiness needs without having to send another query to the database.

If you want to add information to the document that is not in the data provider,then you must add the object to the query and run the query again to get the newinformation.

What is Scope of Analysis?The scope of analysis for a query is extra data that you can retrieve from thedatabase to give more details about the data returned by each of the objects inthe query. This extra data does not appear in the initial document results, but itremains available in the data provider, so that at any time, you can pull this datainto the report to allow you to access more detail. The process of refining the datato lower levels of detail is called drilling down on an object.

Figure 12: The Scope of Analysis

In an SAP BusinessObjects universe, the scope of analysis corresponds to thehierarchical levels below the object selected for a query. For example, a scope ofanalysis of one level down for the object Year, would include the Quarter object,which appears immediately under Year.

Figure 13: Hierarchical Levels below Year


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


You can set the scope of analysis level when you build a query. It allows objectslower down the hierarchy to be included in the query, without them actuallyappearing in the Result Objects panel. The hierarchies built in a universe allow youto choose your scope of analysis, and correspondingly the level of drill available.

You can also create a custom scope of analysis by selecting specific dimensions inthe Scope of Analysis panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Analyzing the Data Cube

Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe how data retrieved by a query is stored in the document data cube• Explain scope of analysis


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Drilling in an Interactive Analysis Document

Lesson OverviewThe term drill mode in Interactive Analysis refers to two related activities:

• Setting up a Interactive Analysis document so that you and other users cananalyze the reports in drill mode.

• Viewing the document in drill mode, either in one of the Interactive Analysisreport panels or while viewing the document in BI launch, and analyzingthe data at different levels of detail.

In this unit, you will learn how to create documents so that they are drillable,by yourself or by other users.


• Build a drillable document• Drill down in a data hierarchy while viewing a document• Drill in charts

Business ExampleTo create reports that allow report users to autonomously drill up and down thedata hierarchy to investigate different levels of detail, you need to build drillabledocuments.

Building a Drillable DocumentYou can only build drillable documents if your SAP BusinessObjects systemadministrator has authorized your user account to create documents using drillmode.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Drilling in an Interactive Analysis Document

To Build a Drillable Document

1. Create a new document.

2. Add the objects you want the query to retrieve to the Result Objects panel.

3. In the Query panel, click the Scope of Analysis Panel button.

The Scope of Analysis panel opens just below the Query Filters panel inthe Query panel.

4. When necessary, resize the Query Filters panel and the Scope of Analysispanel by clicking and dragging the borders so that you can view the objectsdisplayed there. By default, the level of the scope of analysis for this query isset to None.

The Scope of Analysis panel displays the hierarchical dimension objectsfrom the Result Objects panel.

The objects included in the Scope of Analysis panel are the dimension objectsin your Result Objects panel that are part of a hierarchy in the universe.

5. Click the Display by Navigation Paths option located at the top of theUniverse outline.

The Display by Navigation Paths view shows all the predefined hierarchiescreated in the universe.

6. Expand the navigation folders to see how the universe objects are organizedin hierarchies.

7. In the Scope of Analysis panel, click the drop-down arrow and select theappropriate number of drillable levels for the report.

8.

The objects at the selected number of hierarchical levels below the dimensionobjects you selected for your query appear in the Scope of Analysis panel.

9. Click Run query.

The report displays the values retrieved in a vertical table.

The objects listed in the document's Available Objects pane include allobjects referenced by the level chosen for the scope of analysis. The valuesreturned by those objects are not yet projected in the report but are availablein the document for drill down.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


This means that the document contains more data than is shown in the report.The query retrieves values for all the objects in the Scope of Analysis panel.The data is available for your analysis, but not displayed immediately inthe table.

Note: In most circumstances, it's more effective to use a cross tableto display information for drilling.

10. To change the table into a cross table, right-click the table and, from thecontextual menu, select Turn Into>Cross Table.

The block displays as a Cross table.


Drilling Down in the Data in a HierarchyYou must activate drill mode to be able to drill down the data in the hierarchy ofa drillable report.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Activate Drill Mode

1. With a drillable document open, click the Analysis toolbox.


3. Click the Interact Drill and from the drop-down menu, select Start Drill.

All the values in the cells appear underlined with hypertext links. Thesehypertext links allow you to drill down the hierarchies to see data at a moredetailed level.

4. Position your mouse pointer over the cell you would like to drill on.

A tool tip appears below the hypertext link displaying the next level of detailin this hierarchy of data.

5. Click the cell to drill down to the next level of data.

The table displays rows of data applicable only to the cell selected and at thenext level of the hierarchy.

An arrow displays next to the drilled-down data. To drill back up, clickthe arrows beside each cell.

As you are drilling, a new toolbar appears at the top of the document, calledthe Drill toolbar. This toolbar displays the values you have selected to drilldown into more detail.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Drill across Data in a Hierarchy

1. After drilling down in a report, click the drop-down arrow in the Drill toolbarto view the other values you can drill across to.

2. From the drop-down list, select the value you would like to drill across to.

The report displays data concerning the value you selected.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Drill Down Two Hierarchies at Once

1. In a drillable report, position your cursor over a cell in a row or columndisplaying values for a measure object, for example Sales revenue.

Clicking in a cell displaying a dimension value only drills down for theselected dimension. Clicking in a cell displaying a measure value allows youto drill down on multiple hierarchies at once.

A tooltip appears to indicate that by clicking the cell, you drill down onmultiple values at once.

2. Click the cell to drill down.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Edit the Scope of AnalysisUseWhen you are drilling on a hierarchy, you may discover that you need to drill to alower level than you had previously allowed for when setting the scope of analysis.

Procedure1. Click the Data Access toolbar.

2. Click the Data Provider tab.

3. Click Edit.


4. Click the Scope of Analysis Panel button.

5. The Scope of Analysis Panel displays.

6. Change the level of detail that you defined in the Scope of Analysis panel.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Drill in Charts2. In the report that displays the drillable chart, click the Analysis toolbox.


4. Click Drill.

The Drill toolbar displays just above the report. The filters drop-down listappears in this area as you drill, so that you can drill across to other valuesat the same level of detail.

5. Position your mouse pointer over the sections of the chart.

A tooltip appears indicating that you can drill down to the next level of detail.

6. Click the appropriate section in the chart to drill down to the next level.

The chart displays the drilled-down data. The chart legend indicates the levelof data displayed in the chart and displays the drill up arrow that allows youto move back up one level in the hierarchy.

A filter drop-down list appears above the chart, which allows you to drillacross to see other data.

7. Click the arrow next to the drop-down list and select a different value fromthe list.

The chart breaks down the chart sections to display the new values selected.

You can also drill down, across and up from the contextual menu thatdisplays when you right-click the drillable data.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Build a drillable document• Drill down in a data hierarchy while viewing a document• Drill in charts


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Describe how data retrieved by a query is stored in the document data cube• Explain scope of analysis• Build a drillable document• Drill down in a data hierarchy while viewing a document• Drill in charts


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. What is a Scope of Analysis for a query?

2. Drill mode in Interactive Analysis refers to two activities. What are thetwo activities?

3. How can you drill up on the data in a chart?


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. What is a Scope of Analysis for a query?

Answer: The scope of analysis for a query is extra levels of data in anobject's hierarchy that you can retrieve from the database to give moredetailed data returned by each of the objects. This extra data does not appearin the initial document results, but it remains available in the data cube, ordata provider, so you can pull this data into the report to allow you to accessmore detail at any time.

2. Drill mode in Interactive Analysis refers to two activities. What are thetwo activities?

Answer:

• Setting up a Interactive Analysis document so that you and other userscan analyze the reports in drill mode.

• Viewing the document in drill mode, either in one of the InteractiveAnalysis report panels or while viewing the document in BI launch, andanalyzing the data at different levels of detail.

3. How can you drill up on the data in a chart?

Answer: You can right-click the chart and use the contextual menu or youcan click the up arrow that displays in the chart legend.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 10Managing and Sharing Interactive

Analysis Documents

Unit OverviewUsing the Interactive Analysis Desktop, of from within BI launch pad, you canshare your documents with both colleagues who use Interactive Analysis users andcolleagues who do not. You can also use BI launch pad to schedule a document torefresh automatically at specific times.


• Publish an Interactive Analysis document to the corporate repository• Access the BI Launch Pad• Describe the Home Page• Describe document storage areas• Describe folders and categories• Perform a search for a document• Open and view an Interactive Analysis document• Save a document in BI launch pad• Close a Interactive Analysis document• Send documents to other BI Launch Pad users• Set BI general Launch Pad Preferences• Log off from BI launch pad

Unit ContentsLesson: Publishing Documents to the Corporate Repository .. . . . . . . . . . . .345

Procedure: To Publish a Interactive Analysis Document to the CMS 347Lesson: Logging in to the BI Launch Pad ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349

Procedure: To Access the BI Launch Pad Log On Page... . . . . . . . . . . .350Lesson: Managing Documents in BI Launch Pad ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353

Procedure: To Search for Documents in BI Launch Pad... . . . . . . . . . . .355Lesson: Viewing an Interactive Analysis Document in BI Launch Pad ..357


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit 10: Managing and Sharing Interactive Analysis Documents BOW310

Procedure: To Open an Interactive Analysis Document.. . . . . . . . . . . . . .358Procedure: To Save a Document in BI Launch Pad ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359Procedure: To Print a Interactive Analysis Document .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360

Lesson: Sharing Interactive Analysis Documents .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362Procedure: To Send a Document to Another BI Launch Pad User ..364Procedure: To Schedule a Document.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365

Lesson: Setting BI Launch Pad Preferences... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367Procedure: To Set General BI Launch Pad Preferences... . . . . . . . . . . .368

Lesson: Logging off from BI Launch Pad ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371Procedure: To Log off from BI Launch Pad ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372Exercise 13: Managing and Sharing Interactive AnalysisDocuments .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Publishing Documents to the Corporate Repository

Lesson: Publishing Documents to the CorporateRepository

Lesson OverviewSo far, you have been working in Interactive Analysis Desktop, a standaloneapplication that can be operated either connected to or disconnected from theSAP BusinessObjects Enterprise Central Management Server (CMS). All thedocuments that you have saved have been stored on your local computer, andare therefore accessible only to you.

In this lesson, you work with Interactive Analysis documents in BI launch pad,a portal that you access via your internet browser. One of the advantages of BIlaunch pad is that it allows Web Intelligence documents to be published, accessed,and shared by multiple users. To make a Interactive Analysis document that youcreated with the Interactive Analysis Desktop available via BI launch pad, youmust first publish the document to the CMS.


• Publish an Interactive Analysis document to the corporate repository

Business ExampleYour organization may include report users who do not use Interactive AnalysisDesktop, but access the BI launch pad to work with reports. To share reportscreated in Interactive Analysis Desktop with colleagues who use BI launch pad,you need to publish the documents to the CMS.

Publishing a Interactive Analysis DocumentDocuments are published to the CMS in their current state, including allmodifications made since they were created or opened. This means that in additionto locally-saved documents, you can publish a document to the CMS withoutsaving it locally. A newly created document that is published before being savedwill be given the name "Document X", where X is the document creation orderin the session.

Folders and CategoriesWhen you publish a document to the CMS, you need to select the folder in whichyou want to save the document, and can optionally select a category with whichyou want to associate the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Folders:

• Are used as containers for documents to store and organize informationwithin the system.

• Can hold many documents. A document can only belong to one folder.However, you can create shortcuts to documents and place the shortcutsin other folders.

• Can be Public (Public Folders) or Personal (My Favorites).

Files stored to Public Folders are available to other BI launch padusers. Files stored to folders within My Favorites are only accessibleto you.

Categories:

• Are used to tag documents in a meaningful way to classify them fororganizational purposes.

• Allow users to view documents across the system because a category is notconstrained by the document's storage location.

• Can be Corporate (Corporate Categories) or Personal (PersonalCategories).

Corporate categories are accessible to other users, but Personal categoriesare accessible only to you, for instance, for organizing documents associatedwith a particular project.

The folders and categories that you see in the Publish a document to the serverdialog box are the same as those you will encounter on the Documents tab inBI launch pad.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Publishing Documents to the Corporate Repository

To Publish a Interactive Analysis Document to the CMS

1. From the document you want to publish, click the arrow beside the Savebutton and, from the drop-down menu, select Publish to.

2. In the Publish a document to the server dialog box, click the Folders tab,then select the folder in which you want the document to be published.

3. To associate a category with the document, click the Categories tab andselect one or more available categories.

4. Click Save.

After you start to publish, you cannot cancel it.

The document is published to the CMS, where it is available in the folderyou chose, associated with the categories you chose.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Publish an Interactive Analysis document to the corporate repository


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Logging in to the BI Launch Pad

Lesson: Logging in to the BI Launch Pad

Lesson OverviewEach time you log in to the BI launch pad, the SAP BusinessObjects Enterpriseserver checks your user account name and details to ensure that you are anauthorized user.


• Access the BI Launch Pad• Describe the Home Page

Business ExampleSome report users in your organization may log into the BI launch pad to view,create and share their reports instead of using the Interactive Analysis Desktopapplication.

Accessing the BI Launch Pad Log On PageTo use BI launch pad, you must start your web browser.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Access the BI Launch Pad Log On PageUseBefore you can use BI launch pad and Interactive Analysis you need the followinginformation:

• Your user name and password

Contact your administrator for these details if you do not already know them.

You access Interactive Analysis by using your web browser to log onto BI launchpad, the corporate business intelligence portal. Once you are in BI launch pad, youcan analyze and enhance Interactive Analysis reports.

Procedure1. Launch your web browser.

2. Point your browser to the BI launch pad bookmark or URL.

When you have one or more SAP BusinessObjects client tools installed, youcan also launch BI launch pad via the Start menu.

The BI launch pad Log On page appears.

3. In the User Name box, type your user name.

4. In the Password box, type your password.

5. Click Log On.

The BI launch pad Home page appears.

The Home PageThe first time you start BI launch pad, the Home page opens by default. Dependingon how your system administrator or you configure BI launch pad, your ownHome page may not differ from what you see in the course.

From the Home tab, click the Document tab and, then, My Favorites, or My Inboxto access the folders in which documents are stored.

You can return to the Home tab display at any time by clicking the Home tab.

About BI Launch Pad FoldersIn My Favorites, you can choose to store any documents or sub-folders thatyou create yourself.

The Inbox contains documents that have been sent to you by other users.

Public Folders are created by administrators and may contain sub-folderscreated by users who are authorized to do so.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Logging in to the BI Launch Pad

About BI Launch Pad CategoriesIn BI launch pad, documents can also be organized in Personal or CorporateCategories. Using categories in BI launch pad is a way of grouping documentstogether, regardless of which folders they are actually stored in.

Folders and subfolders are used to organize documents, while categories are a wayto classify your information. For example, you could place your financial reportsand documents into a folder named Finance and you could classify or tag yourreports that deal with specific financial matters as Payroll, Accounts Payable, andAccounts Receivable.

Creating New DocumentsFrom the Document tab in theMy Documents area, you can create new documentsusing Interactive Analysis, when your system administrator has authorized youruser account to do so.

Setting BI Launch Pad PreferencesYou can access BI launch pad options to define document viewing settings byclicking Preferences at the top of the BI launch pad page.

Areas of the BI Launch Pad PageThe BI launch pad page is organized into the following areas:

• Title Bar: This area contains the desktop logo and a message displayingyour user account name.

Navigation Bar: This area contains buttons and menus for Applications,Preferences, Help, Log Off.

• Home tab: This area displays an overview of recently viewed or rundocuments, inbox messages and alerts. To the right, display buttons forquick access to applications.

• Document tab: This area displays a left pane where you can display tabsfor My Documents, Folders, where you find Public Folders, Categories,where you find Public or Personal categories, and Search. The contents ofthe related tab display in the Workspace Panel. The Document tab toolbar,allows you to work within the different tabs.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Access the BI Launch Pad• Describe the Home Page


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Managing Documents in BI Launch Pad

Lesson: Managing Documents in BI Launch Pad

Lesson OverviewBI launch pad acts as a portal to all the information available to you. You cannavigate to the information via three different document storage areas and you canperform searches to locate documents.


• Describe document storage areas• Describe folders and categories• Perform a search for a document

Business ExampleYour organization may use BI launch pad to allow report users to create and viewreports and to share information so you need to know how to manage documentsthere.

Document Storage AreasWith BI launch pad, you can access the following document storage areas:

• Public Documents - a catalog of all the documents that you are authorizedto access in the SAP BusinessObjects Central Management Server. Thesedocuments have been published by other report users. You can access thesedocuments from your BI launch pad Public Folders or Corporate Categories.

• My Favorites - a catalog of all the documents that you have chosen to savefor your own personal use. These documents are stored in space on the SAPBusinessObjects server that has been reserved for your own use.

• Inbox - a catalog of documents that other BI launch pad users have sentto you.

Folders and Categories in BI Launch PadBI launch pad provides you with two main ways to navigate through documentsand organize information: folders and categories. Each of these navigationmethods is hierarchical, meaning BI launch pad displays them in a tree in theDocument tab.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Searching for DocumentsYou can also use BI launch pad to:

• Search for specific documents.• Create a shortcut to a document.• Filter documents in a list.

The Search feature in BI launch pad enables you to search for documents withincategories or folders based on words contained in the document title, keywords,or all fields.

By default, all documents that you are authorized to view are displayed in yourfolder and category lists. If you want to temporarily limit the type of documentsdisplayed to improve search capabilities, you can add a filter. Applying a filter toyour document lists allows you to view only documents of a certain type.

The various document types that you can filter include documents from InteractiveAnalysis and other BusinessObjects end-user querying tools, Microsoft Excel,Power Point, program objects, object packages, and text files.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Managing Documents in BI Launch Pad

To Search for Documents in BI Launch Pad

1. Click the Documents tab.

2. In the Search field at that top of the page, type your search term and clickthe Search button.

Note: When you pause while typing your search term, a drop-downlist of documents containing the letters you have typed displays.

Any object with your search term in the title displays in theWorkspace Panel.

On the Search tab, under Refine search results by, filters display. They allowyou to filter the search results based on specific criteria. The number ofoccurrences that correspond to each filter also displays.

3. Optionally on the Search tab, click one of the search criterion.

The filtered results display in the Workspace.

4. Scroll through the results in the Workspace and select the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Describe document storage areas• Describe folders and categories• Perform a search for a document


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Viewing an Interactive Analysis Document in BI Launch Pad

Lesson: Viewing an Interactive Analysis Document inBI Launch Pad

Lesson OverviewIn BI launch pad, you can view documents that were created with InteractiveAnalysis and other SAP end-user querying tools when the administrator hasauthorized you to view those formats as well as documents created with othernon-SAP applications.


• Open and view an Interactive Analysis document• Save a document in BI launch pad• Close a Interactive Analysis document

Business ExampleYour organization may have report users who use BI launch pad to viewInteractive Analysis documents so you need to know how to open, view and closethe documents.

Viewing Interactive Analysis DocumentsBI launch pad allows you to open Interactive Analysis documents for easy access.

Within BI launch pad, you can edit Interactive Analysis documents if you areauthorized to use one of the Interactive Analysis report panels (the InteractiveHTML querying and/or reporting panels, or the Java Report Panel).

You can modify the document's underlying query if you are authorized to accessthe universe that was used to create the document.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Open an Interactive Analysis Document

1. Locate the document you want to open and double-click the document name.Clicking the document name opens the most current version of the report.

The document opens in the Workspace Panel.

2. Click the Reading or Design button on the toolbar, according to the modeyou want to use to view the document.

The toolboxes and toolbars in each mode is similar to the ones in InteractiveAnalysis Desktop.

Saving a Document in BI Launch PadYou can choose to either save the document to a folder in BI launch pad, or to saveit to a location on your computer, in one of several different formats.

The Save as dialog box allows you to save the document to your computer inMicrosoft Excel, Adobe Acrobat PDF, or CSV format, while the Save Reportto my Computer As saves only the report you are currently viewing, in eitherExcel or PDF format.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Save a Document in BI Launch Pad

1. In the document, click the Save button.

The Save As dialog box opens:

2. Select the folder where you want to save the document.

3. You can replace the default document title by typing the document namein the Filename field.

4. Click the arrow icon to see additional saving options.

5. Optionally, type a description of the document in the Description field.

6. When you want the data in this document to be automatically refreshed everytime you or another user opens it, select the Refresh on open option.

As a best practice, only use this option when you have a specific reasonfor doing so. When you do not use it, you ensure that users always seethe original data that was retrieved when the document was created or lastrefreshed, and which was stored in the document when it was saved.

7. Optionally, select the category you want to use to reference the document.

8. Click Save.

Printing a Interactive Analysis DocumentTo print Interactive Analysis documents, you need to display the document inPDF format and print it from Acrobat Reader. To ensure quality printing, neverprint using the browser print button.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Print a Interactive Analysis Document

1. In the document, on the toolbar click the arrow next to the Export button and,from the drop-down, select the item that corresponds to what part of thedocument (the document, the current report) you want to save and the formatof the file to which you want to save it (Excel, PDF, CSV).

A dialog box displays asking you to open or save the file.

2. Click Save.

3. In the Save As dialog box, specify the file name and location for the PDF.

4. To print the document, open the PDF in a PDF reading application and setthe appropriate print settings.

Each report within the Interactive Analysis document will need to be printedindividually.

Closing a Interactive Analysis DocumentTo close the Interactive Analysis document, click the X button in the right-handcorner of the report tab.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Open and view an Interactive Analysis document• Save a document in BI launch pad• Close a Interactive Analysis document


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson: Sharing Interactive Analysis Documents

Lesson OverviewIf you are sharing documents with BI launch pad users, you can send yourdocuments directly to their BI launch pad Inbox folder or you can choose tosave them as public documents in the corporate repository, when your SAPBusinessObjects system administrator has authorized you to do so.


• Send documents to other BI Launch Pad users

Business ExampleTo exchange information with your colleagues via BI launch pad, you need toknow how to send documents to other BI launch pad users.

Sharing Documents with BI Launch Pad UsersTo share documents with other BI launch pad users, you can either send adocument to a user's Inbox, or you can save it as a public document, if you areauthorized to do so.

Sending a Document to UsersSending documents is the ideal method for communicating information toindividual users and groups of users. The documents are sent through thecorporate repository and users can then retrieve the document from their BIlaunch pad Inbox.

Note: You can only send documents to users that have been set up in thesystem by the administrator.

Saving a Public DocumentWhen you save a document to a public folder or category, you are making itavailable to a wide audience of users. When given the appropriate access rights,your colleagues can then refresh or modify the document and save it again, makingit easy to collaborate with one another.

Public documents remain in the repository until removed by the BusinessObjectssystem administrator. This method is ideal for communicating information acrossan organization.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Sharing Interactive Analysis Documents

You can only save documents to public folders if you have been authorized to doso by the system administrator.

Note: You can only send documents to users that have been set up in thesystem by the administrator.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Send a Document to Another BI Launch Pad User

1. From the document, click the File tab.

2. Click the arrow beside the Send button and select Send to user.

3. Select the users or groups to which you want to send the document fromthe list of users and groups.

4. Click Automatically generated to send the document with anautomatically-generated name.

5. Click Specific name and type the name in the box to send if you want toname the document.

6. Click Shortcut to send a shortcut to the document or Copy to send a copyof the document.

7. Click Send to send the document.

Sharing beyond Interactive AnalysisTo share with colleagues who are not users of Interactive Analysis or otherSAP BusinessObjects querying tools, you can save your reports in Adobe PDF,Microsoft Excel or CSV format. That way, you and your colleagues can easilyview and print them using Adobe Acrobat Reader or Excel. When you savea document in PDF format, the page layout and formatting of the InteractiveAnalysis document is retained in the PDF file.

Scheduling Documents in BI Launch PadScheduling a document lets you run it automatically at specified times. Whena scheduled document runs successfully, an instance is created. An instanceis a version of the object containing the data available at the time it was run.Therefore, instances created later contain more recent data.

You can see a list of instances by looking at a document's history, and you canclick the link to any historical instance. If you have the rights to view objects ondemand, you can view and refresh any Interactive Analysis document to retrievethe latest data from the database.

By scheduling and viewing instances, you can ensure you have the latestinformation available for viewing, printing, and distributing. For example, youcan schedule a report object (document) to run every night so it's available foryou first thing in the morning.

Before scheduling objects, check your time zone setting on the Preferences pagein BI launch pad. The default time zone is local to the web server that is runningSAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Sharing Interactive Analysis Documents

To Schedule a Document

1. On the Documents tab, navigate to the document you would like to schedule,and select it.

2. Click the arrow beside More Actions and, from the drop-down menu, selectSchedule.

The Schedule page appears. The links on the left of the screen allow you toview and modify different schedule settings.

3. Click Recurrence.

The Recurrence page displays.

4. Click the Run Object drop-down arrow and select the appropriate recurrenceschedule from the list.

After you select the recurrence schedule, the additional information requiredon the Recurrence page depends on the schedule you selected.

5. Based on your access rights, you can modify the Formats and Destinations,Caching, Events, and Scheduling Server Group settings as required.

6. When you have entered all the required information, click Schedule.

The History page for the document displays, indicating the report instancetimes, and the status of each instance.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Send documents to other BI Launch Pad users


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Setting BI Launch Pad Preferences

Lesson: Setting BI Launch Pad Preferences

Lesson OverviewBI launch pad provides you with the ability to determine your preferences forviewing and creating documents. From the Preferences page, you can alter BIlaunch pad general preferences, alter document viewing preferences for documentsand change your password.


• Set BI general Launch Pad Preferences

Business ExampleYou need to understand the impact that the preferences have on BI launch pad.

Setting General BI Launch Pad PreferencesYou can set general BI launch pad preferences by using the Preferences buttonon the toolbar.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Set General BI Launch Pad Preferences

1. On the Home page, click Preferences.

The Preferences dialog box opens.

In the General area, you can modify the following options:

• The initial view that displays after logging onto BI launch pad.• The default view in the Documents tab.• The maximum number of objects displayed on each page.• For lists on the Documents tab, you can determine which document

properties are displayed, including the description, owner, date, andinstance count. You can also change where documents are viewed:either in the BI launch pad window or in separate browser windows.

• Product locale, viewing locale, and time zone settings are alsodetermined on this page.

2. Set preferences and click OK.

The preferences are now applied.

About Document Preferences in BI Launch PadInteractive Analysis documents and documents from other BusinessObjectsend-user querying tools all have different view options that can be set as default.The default determines the view that is applied when a document is first opened.The view format can always be changed after the document has been opened.

In general, the different views are aimed at satisfying one of two things:

• Quality in Viewing - These options are aimed at users that primarily view thereports over the web. These formats are not ideal for printing. InteractiveAnalysis provides Web and Rich Internet Application modes that areintended for users that usually look at reports online.

• Quality in Printing - These options are aimed at users that primarily printtheir reports. These reports print exactly as they appear on the screen andprovide much better print quality than HTML. Interactive Analysis providesPDF for the users that primarily print their documents.

About Interactive Analysis Viewing SettingsBI launch pad provides a number of formats for viewing Interactive Analysisdocuments. You can define one viewing format as the default option for your useraccount by setting the appropriate option in the BI launch pad Preferences page.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Setting BI Launch Pad Preferences

Your choice of viewing modes depends on your license and your security profile.Potentially, you can choose to view Interactive Analysis documents in thefollowing formats:

• Web: You view documents using the HTML interface within the BI launchpad.

• Rich Internet Application: You view documents using the Java interfacewithin the BI launch pad.

Note: The Java interface requires the download of a Java applet.

• Desktop: You view documents using Interactive Analysis Desktop, astandalone interface that works outside the BI launch pad and allows you towork with documents without being connected to a corporate repository.

Note: Interactive Analysis Desktop requires an install on your localmachine.

• Portable Document Format (PDF): You view documents statically in PDFformat.

You can experiment with all of the formats described by changing the default viewoptions in BI launch pad. The settings that are most appropriate for you depend onyour organization's requirements as well as your own preferences.

Setting Interactive Analysis PreferencesIn Preferences the Interactive Analysis area allows you to set a number of optionsthat define:

• How you view Interactive Analysis documents in BI launch pad.• Which interface you will use to create Interactive Analysis documents.• How you will perform multi-dimensional analysis in Interactive Analysis

documents.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Set BI general Launch Pad Preferences


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Lesson: Logging off from BI Launch Pad

Lesson: Logging off from BI Launch Pad

Lesson OverviewWhen you finish using BI launch pad, you should log off rather than closing yourbrowser window.

When you use the Log Off button, you terminate your session and this improvesserver performance.


• Log off from BI launch pad

Business ExampleWhen you finish your BI Launch pad session, you need to log off to terminateyour session cleanly and improve server performance.

Closing Your BI Launch Pad SessionBy logging off from BI launch pad, you can save any settings you may havechanged. Logging off also helps the BI launch pad system administrator keeptrack of which users are logged onto the system at any given time. This allows theadministrator to configure the system and handle transaction loads most efficiently.

There is a default time-out setting, after which a user is automatically loggedoff from BI launch pad. For more information, see your SAP BusinessObjectsadministrator.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


To Log off from BI Launch Pad

1. On the BI launch pad toolbar, click the Log Out button.

The Log On page now displays in your browser and you have logged off.

If you have made any changes to your options and have not saved them, orare closing a document without saving changes, a log off confirmation pagedisplays.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Exercise 13: Managing and SharingInteractive Analysis Documents

Exercise ObjectivesAfter completing this exercise, you will be able to:• Publish a document to the corporate repository• Log into BI launch pad• View the documents that are available to you• Open the document you exported• Schedule a document• Save a document locally as an Excel or PDF• Log Off BI launch pad

Business ExampleWhen you organization provides report users access to BI launch pad for thepurposes of managing and sharing documents, you need to know how to log intothe portal, navigate in the interface and log off.

Task:Publish a documen to BI launch pad, log into BI launch pad, open the document,schedule another document, save the document locally in an Excel or PDF formatand log off BI launch pad.

1. From within Interactive Analysis Desktop, select a document that youcreated during the class and publish it to the corporate repository.

2. Log onto BI launch pad with the username and password supplied by yourinstructor.

3. Open the document you published, refresh it and close it.

4. Navigate to Public Folders and schedule a document from the folder to runnow.

5. Open the scheduled document, open it as an Excel sheet or PDF and savethe document.

6. Log off BI launch pad.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Solution 13: Managing and SharingInteractive Analysis DocumentsTask:Publish a documen to BI launch pad, log into BI launch pad, open the document,schedule another document, save the document locally in an Excel or PDF formatand log off BI launch pad.

1. From within Interactive Analysis Desktop, select a document that youcreated during the class and publish it to the corporate repository.

a) From the document you want to publish, click the arrow beside theSave button and, from the drop-down menu, select Publish to.

b) In the Publish a document to the server dialog box, click the Folderstab, then select My Favorites.

c) Optionally, to associate a category with the document, click theCategories tab and select one or more available categories.

d) Click Save.

2. Log onto BI launch pad with the username and password supplied by yourinstructor.

a) Launch BI launch pad via the Start menu.

b) Type your username and password.

c) Click OK.

3. Open the document you published, refresh it and close it.

a) Click Documents.

b) Click My Favorites.

c) Double-click the document you published to open it.

4. Navigate to Public Folders and schedule a document from the folder to runnow.

a) Click the Folders tab.

b) Click Public Folders and navigate to the document that interests you.

c) In the Workspace, select the document.

d) From the More Actions dropdown, select Schedule.

e) In the Schedule dialog box, click the Recurrence tab.

f) Leave the default value of Now and click Schedule.



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


5. Open the scheduled document, open it as an Excel sheet or PDF and savethe document.

a) Click the document.

b) In the toolbar, click Export>Export document as and select the formatto which you want to save the document.

c) Click Open.

d) Save the document locally.

6. Log off BI launch pad.

a) Click Log Off.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Lesson Summary

You should now be able to:• Log off from BI launch pad


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Unit Summary

Unit SummaryYou should now be able to:• Publish an Interactive Analysis document to the corporate repository• Access the BI Launch Pad• Describe the Home Page• Describe document storage areas• Describe folders and categories• Perform a search for a document• Open and view an Interactive Analysis document• Save a document in BI launch pad• Close a Interactive Analysis document• Send documents to other BI Launch Pad users• Set BI general Launch Pad Preferences• Log off from BI launch pad


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Unit Summary BOW310


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Test Your Knowledge

1. When you publish a document, you must select both a folder and a category.Determine whether this statement is true or false.□ True□ False

2. What are the two kinds of categories and folders?

3. What are the differences between categories and folders?

4. What are the three storage areas in BI launch pad?

5. What type of documents can you view in BI launch pad?

6. Describe the three ways of sharing Interactive Analysis documents withother BI Launch pad users.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


7. In what formats can you save your documents to share them with colleagueswho do not have access to BI launch pad?


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly


Answers

1. When you publish a document, you must select both a folder and a category.

Answer: False

You must select a folder. Selecting a category is optional.

2. What are the two kinds of categories and folders?

Answer: Personal and Corporate

3. What are the differences between categories and folders?

Answer: Categories allow users to classify documents across the system,regardless of the document's actual storage location. Folders are used ascontainers for documents to store and organize information within thesystem. They can hold many documents but a document cannot belong tomore than one folder.

4. What are the three storage areas in BI launch pad?

Answer: Public documents, My Folders and Inbox

5. What type of documents can you view in BI launch pad?

Answer: The types of documents available to you in BI launch pad dependon the installation of the applications in your organization. However, theprinciple document types for BI launch pad include Interactive Analysisdocuments, Crystal Report documents, Microsoft Word, PowerPoint andExcel documents, Adobe Acrobat PDF documents and text files.

6. Describe the three ways of sharing Interactive Analysis documents withother BI Launch pad users.

Answer: You can share documents by sending them to a user's inbox, savingto a PDF or Excel format or saving the document to the corporate folderor category.

7. In what formats can you save your documents to share them with colleagueswho do not have access to BI launch pad?

Answer: Excel, CSV or PDF


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly



F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

BOW310 Course Summary

Course SummaryYou should now be able to:

• Efficiently and effectively manage personal and corporate documents toaccess the information you and report users need.

• Design reports using Interactive Analysis and share your analysis with otherusers.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Course Summary BOW310


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

FeedbackSAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure theaccuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections orsuggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in thecourse evaluation.


F

or

in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly

Fo

r in

te

rn

al u

se

b

y C

SC

o

nly